APE Price: $1.23 (+16.25%)

Contract Diff Checker

Contract Name:
FreeeERC721C

Contract Source Code:

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.22;

import {AccessControl} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/AccessControl.sol";
import {ReentrancyGuard} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/security/ReentrancyGuard.sol";
import {IERC2981, IERC165} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/interfaces/IERC2981.sol";
import {MerkleProof} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import {
    ERC721ACQueryableInitializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AUpgradeable
} from "./creator-token-standards/ERC721ACQueryableInitializable.sol";
import {IERC721Collection} from "./interfaces/IERC721Collection.sol";
import {IMetadataRenderer} from "./interfaces/IMetadataRenderer.sol";
import {IOwnable} from "./interfaces/IOwnable.sol";
import {IArbInfo} from "./interfaces/IArbInfo.sol";
import {ERC721CollectionStorageV1} from "./storage/ERC721CollectionStorageV1.sol";
import {OwnableSkeleton} from "./utils/OwnableSkeleton.sol";
import {PublicMulticall} from "./utils/PublicMulticall.sol";
import {Version} from "./utils/Version.sol";

contract FreeeERC721C is
    ERC721ACQueryableInitializable,
    IERC721Collection,
    IERC2981,
    AccessControl,
    ReentrancyGuard,
    OwnableSkeleton,
    PublicMulticall,
    Version,
    ERC721CollectionStorageV1
{
    /// @dev This is the max mint batch size for the optimized ERC721A mint contract
    uint256 internal immutable MAX_MINT_BATCH_SIZE = 8;

    /// @dev Gas limit to send funds
    uint256 internal immutable FUNDS_SEND_GAS_LIMIT = 210_000;

    /// @dev This is the max number of presale stage allowed
    uint256 internal immutable PRESALE_STAGES_ALLOWED = 5;

    /// @notice Access control roles
    bytes32 public immutable SALES_MANAGER_ROLE = keccak256("SALES_MANAGER");
    

    /// @notice Freee Mint Fee
    uint256 private immutable MINT_FEE;

    /// @notice Mint Fee Recipient
    address payable private immutable MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT;

    /// @notice Max royalty BPS
    uint16 constant MAX_ROYALTY_BPS = 50_00;

    /// @notice Only allow for users with admin access
    modifier onlyAdmin() {
        if (!hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender())) {
            revert Access_OnlyAdmin();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Only a given role has access or admin
    /// @param role role to check for alongside the admin role
    modifier onlyRoleOrAdmin(bytes32 role) {
        if (!hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender()) && !hasRole(role, _msgSender())) {
            revert Access_MissingRoleOrAdmin(role);
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Allows user to mint tokens at a quantity
    modifier canMintTokens(uint256 quantity) {
        if (quantity + _totalMinted() > config.collectionSize) {
            revert Mint_SoldOut();
        }

        _;
    }

    function _presaleActive(uint256 stageIndex) internal view returns (bool) {
        return 
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleStart > 0 && 
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleStart <= block.timestamp && 
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleEnd > block.timestamp;
    }

    function _publicSaleActive() internal view returns (bool) {
        return 
            !publicSaleConfig.publicSaleDisabled &&
            publicSaleConfig.publicSaleStart > 0 &&
            publicSaleConfig.publicSaleStart <= block.timestamp && 
            publicSaleConfig.publicSaleEnd > block.timestamp;
    }

    /// @notice Presale active
    modifier onlyPresaleActive(uint256 stagIndex) {
        if (!_presaleActive(stagIndex)) {
            revert Presale_Inactive();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Public sale active
    modifier onlyPublicSaleActive() {
        if (!_publicSaleActive()) {
            revert Sale_Inactive();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Can transfer token
    modifier canTradeToken() {
        bool mintedOut = uint256(config.collectionSize) == _totalMinted();
        if (config.lockBeforeMintOut && !mintedOut) {
            revert Collection_TradingLocked();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Getter for last minted token ID (gets next token id and subtracts 1)
    function _lastMintedTokenId() internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _nextTokenId() - 1;
    }

    /// @notice Start token ID for minting (1-100 vs 0-99)
    function _startTokenId() internal pure override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }

    constructor(uint256 _mintFeeAmount, address _mintFeeRecipient) {
        MINT_FEE = _mintFeeAmount;
        MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT = payable(_mintFeeRecipient);
        _disableInitializers();
    }

    /// @notice Initializes the contract
    function initialize(
        string memory _contractName,
        string memory _contractSymbol,
        address _initialOwner,
        address _fundsRecipient,
        uint64 _collectionSize,
        uint16 _royaltyBPS,
        address _royaltyRecipient,
        bytes[] calldata _setupCalls,
        bool _tradingLocked,
        bool _revealed,
        address _escrowHandler
    ) external initializer initializerERC721A {
        __ERC721ACQueryableInitializable_init(_contractName, _contractSymbol);
        _setOwner(_initialOwner);
        if (_escrowHandler == address(0)) {
            // Setup default admin role
            _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _initialOwner);
            config.fundsRecipient = payable(_fundsRecipient);
        } else {
            // Setup default admin role to escrow address
            _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _escrowHandler);
            config.fundsRecipient = payable(_escrowHandler);
            // Set initial owner as sales manager
            _setupRole(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE, _initialOwner);
        }

        // Setup temporary role
        _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, msg.sender);
        // Execute setupCalls
        multicall(_setupCalls);
        // Remove temporary role
        _revokeRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, msg.sender);

        // Setup config variables
        config.collectionSize = _collectionSize;
        config.royaltyBPS = _royaltyBPS;
        config.royaltyRecipient = payable(_royaltyRecipient);
        config.revealed = _revealed;
        config.lockBeforeMintOut = _tradingLocked;

        IArbInfo(0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000065).configureAutomaticYield();

    }

    /// @dev Getter for role associated with the contract to handle metadata
    /// @return boolean if address is admin or sale manager
    function isAdmin(address user) external view returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, user) || hasRole(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE, user);
    }

    /// @param tokenId Token ID to burn
    /// @notice User burn function for token id
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) public {
        _burn(tokenId, true);
    }

    /// @dev Get royalty information for token
    /// @param _salePrice Sale price for the token
    function royaltyInfo(uint256, uint256 _salePrice) external view override returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount) {
        if (config.royaltyRecipient == address(0)) {
            return (config.royaltyRecipient, 0);
        }
        return (config.royaltyRecipient, (_salePrice * config.royaltyBPS) / 10_000);
    }

    /// @dev Number of NFTs the user has minted per address
    /// @param minter to get counts for
    function mintedPerAddress(address minter) external view override returns (IERC721Collection.AddressMintDetails memory) {
        uint256 totalPresaleMints = _totalPresaleMinted(_msgSender());
        uint256[] memory mintsByStage = new uint256[](PRESALE_STAGES_ALLOWED);
        mintsByStage[0] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][1];
        mintsByStage[1] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][2];
        mintsByStage[2] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][3];
        mintsByStage[3] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][4];
        mintsByStage[4] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][5];
        return
            IERC721Collection.AddressMintDetails({
                presaleMintsByStage: mintsByStage,
                presaleMints: totalPresaleMints,
                publicMints: _numberMinted(minter) - totalPresaleMints,
                totalMints: _numberMinted(minter)
            });
    }

    /// @notice Freee fee is fixed now per mint
    /// @dev Gets the Freee fee for amount of withdraw
    function feeForAmount(uint256 quantity) public view returns (address payable recipient, uint256 fee) {
        recipient = MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT;
        fee = MINT_FEE * quantity;
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***     PUBLIC MINTING FUNCTIONS       ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/

    /**
      @dev This allows the user to purchase collection item
           at the given price in the contract.
     */
    /// @notice Purchase a quantity of tokens
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @return tokenId of the first token minted
    function purchase(uint256 quantity) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPublicSaleActive returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchase(quantity, "");
    }

    /// @notice Purchase a quantity of tokens with a comment
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @param comment comment to include in the IERC721Collection.Sale event
    /// @return tokenId of the first token minted
    function purchaseWithComment(
        uint256 quantity,
        string memory comment
    ) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPublicSaleActive returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchase(quantity, comment);
    }

    function _handlePurchase(uint256 quantity, string memory comment) internal returns (uint256) {
        uint256 salePrice = publicSaleConfig.publicSalePrice;

        if (msg.value != (salePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity) {
            revert Purchase_WrongPrice((salePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity);
        }

        uint256 presaleMinted = _totalPresaleMinted(_msgSender());
        // If max purchase per address == 0 there is no limit.
        // Any other number, the per address mint limit is that.
        if (
            publicSaleConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress != 0 &&
            _numberMinted(_msgSender()) + quantity - presaleMinted > publicSaleConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress
        ) {
            revert Purchase_TooManyForAddress();
        }

        _mintNFTs(_msgSender(), quantity);
        uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - quantity;

        _payoutFreeeFee(quantity);

        emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
            phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.Public,
            to: _msgSender(),
            quantity: quantity,
            pricePerToken: salePrice,
            firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
            presaleStage: 0
        });
        if (bytes(comment).length > 0) {
            emit IERC721Collection.MintComment({
                sender: _msgSender(),
                tokenContract: address(this),
                tokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
                quantity: quantity,
                comment: comment
            });
        }
        return firstMintedTokenId;
    }

    /// @notice Function to mint NFTs
    /// @dev (important: Does not enforce max supply limit, enforce that limit earlier)
    /// @dev This batches in size of 8 as per recommended by ERC721A creators
    /// @param to address to mint NFTs to
    /// @param quantity number of NFTs to mint
    function _mintNFTs(address to, uint256 quantity) internal {
        do {
            uint256 toMint = quantity > MAX_MINT_BATCH_SIZE ? MAX_MINT_BATCH_SIZE : quantity;
            _mint({to: to, quantity: toMint});
            quantity -= toMint;
        } while (quantity > 0);
    }

    /// @notice Merkle-tree based presale purchase function
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @param maxQuantity max quantity that can be purchased via merkle proof #
    /// @param pricePerToken price that each token is purchased at
    /// @param merkleProof proof for presale mint
    function purchasePresale(
        uint256 stageIndex,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 maxQuantity,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        bytes32[] memory merkleProof
    ) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPresaleActive(stageIndex) returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchasePresale(stageIndex, quantity, maxQuantity, pricePerToken, merkleProof, "");
    }

    /// @notice Merkle-tree based presale purchase function with a comment
    /// @param stageIndex targetted presale stage
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @param maxQuantity max quantity that can be purchased via merkle proof #
    /// @param pricePerToken price that each token is purchased at
    /// @param merkleProof proof for presale mint
    /// @param comment comment to include in the IERC721Collection.Sale event
    function purchasePresaleWithComment(
        uint256 stageIndex,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 maxQuantity,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        bytes32[] memory merkleProof,
        string memory comment
    ) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPresaleActive(stageIndex) returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchasePresale(stageIndex, quantity, maxQuantity, pricePerToken, merkleProof, comment);
    }

    function _handlePurchasePresale(
        uint256 stageIndex,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 maxQuantity,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        bytes32[] memory merkleProof,
        string memory comment
    ) internal returns (uint256) {
        if (stageIndex > activePresaleStageCount) {
            revert Presale_Invalid();
        }

        PresaleConfiguration memory saleConfig = presaleConfig[stageIndex];

        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                merkleProof,
                saleConfig.presaleMerkleRoot,
                keccak256(
                    bytes.concat(
                        keccak256(
                            // address, uint256, uint256
                            abi.encode(_msgSender(), maxQuantity, pricePerToken)
                        )
                    )
                )
            )
        ) {
            revert Presale_MerkleNotApproved();
        }

        uint256 presalePrice = saleConfig.presalePrice;
        if (pricePerToken != presalePrice) {
            presalePrice = pricePerToken;
        }
        if (msg.value != (presalePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity) {
            revert Purchase_WrongPrice((presalePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity);
        }

        uint256 presaleQuantity = saleConfig.presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress;
        if (maxQuantity != presaleQuantity) {
            presaleQuantity = maxQuantity;
        }

        if (presaleMintedByAddress[_msgSender()][stageIndex] + quantity > presaleQuantity) {
            revert Presale_TooManyForAddress();
        }

        bool limitedPresaleSupply = saleConfig.presaleSupply > 0;
        if (limitedPresaleSupply && quantity + saleConfig.presaleMinted > saleConfig.presaleSupply) {
            revert Presale_ExceedStageSupply();
        }

        unchecked {
            presaleMintedByAddress[_msgSender()][stageIndex] += quantity;
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleMinted += uint32(quantity);
        }

        _mintNFTs(_msgSender(), quantity);
        _payoutFreeeFee(quantity);

        uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - quantity;
        emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
            phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.Presale,
            to: _msgSender(),
            quantity: quantity,
            pricePerToken: pricePerToken,
            firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
            presaleStage: stageIndex
        });
        if (bytes(comment).length > 0) {
            emit IERC721Collection.MintComment({
                sender: _msgSender(),
                tokenContract: address(this),
                tokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
                quantity: quantity,
                comment: comment
            });
        }

        return firstMintedTokenId;
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***     ADMIN MINTING FUNCTIONS        ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/

    /// @notice Mint admin
    /// @param recipient recipient to mint to
    /// @param quantity quantity to mint
    function adminMint(address recipient, uint256 quantity) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) canMintTokens(quantity) returns (uint256) {
        _mintNFTs(recipient, quantity);
        uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - quantity;

        emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
            phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.AdminMint,
            to: recipient,
            quantity: quantity,
            pricePerToken: 0,
            firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
            presaleStage: 0
        });

        return _lastMintedTokenId();
    }

    /// @dev This mints a token to the given list of addresses.
    /// @param recipients list of addresses to send the newly minted token to
    function adminMintAirdrop(address[] calldata recipients) external override onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) canMintTokens(recipients.length) returns (uint256) {
        uint256 atId = _nextTokenId();
        uint256 startAt = atId;

        unchecked {
            for (uint256 endAt = atId + recipients.length; atId < endAt; atId++) {
                address recipient = recipients[atId - startAt];
                _mintNFTs(recipient, 1);
                uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - 1;

                emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
                    phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.Airdrop,
                    to: recipient,
                    quantity: 1,
                    pricePerToken: 0,
                    firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
                    presaleStage: 0
                });
            }
        }
        return _lastMintedTokenId();
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***  ADMIN CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS     ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/
    
    /// @dev Set new owner for royalties / opensea
    /// @param newOwner new owner to set
    function setOwner(address newOwner) public onlyAdmin {
        _setOwner(newOwner);
    }

    /// @notice Set a new metadata renderer
    /// @param newRenderer new renderer address to use
    /// @param metadataBase normal metadata to setup new renderer with
    /// @param dynamicMetadataInfo dynamic metadata to setup new renderer with
    function setMetadataRenderer(
        address newRenderer, 
        bytes memory metadataBase, 
        bytes memory dynamicMetadataInfo
    ) public onlyAdmin {
        config.metadataRenderer = IMetadataRenderer(newRenderer);
        (string memory initialBaseURI, string memory initialExtension, string memory initialContractURI) = abi.decode(metadataBase, (string, string, string));
        bytes memory metadataInitializer = abi.encode(initialBaseURI,  initialContractURI);
        config.metadataRenderer.initializeWithData(metadataInitializer, dynamicMetadataInfo);
        if (bytes(initialExtension).length > 0) {            
            config.metadataRenderer.updateMetadataBaseWithDetails(
                address(this), initialBaseURI, initialExtension, initialContractURI, 0
            );
        }

        emit UpdatedMetadataRenderer({sender: _msgSender(), renderer: config.metadataRenderer});
    }

    /// @dev This sets public sale configuration
    /// @param newConfig updated public stage config
    function setPublicSaleConfiguration(PublicSaleConfiguration memory newConfig) public onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        publicSaleConfig.publicSalePrice = newConfig.publicSalePrice;
        publicSaleConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress = newConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress;
        publicSaleConfig.publicSaleStart = newConfig.publicSaleStart;
        publicSaleConfig.publicSaleEnd = newConfig.publicSaleEnd;
        publicSaleConfig.publicSaleDisabled = newConfig.publicSaleDisabled;
        emit PublicSaleConfigChanged(_msgSender());
    }

    /// @dev This set presale configuration, use this when init presale stages or when need to remove presale stage
    /// @param presaleStages presale configuration data
    function setPresaleConfiguration(
        IERC721Collection.PresaleConfiguration[] calldata presaleStages
    ) public onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        uint256 stageLength = presaleStages.length;
        if (stageLength > PRESALE_STAGES_ALLOWED) {
            revert Setup_Presale_StageOutOfRange();
        }

        activePresaleStageCount = stageLength;

        for (uint256 i = 0; i < stageLength; ) {
            uint256 stageIndex = i + 1;
            PresaleConfiguration memory existingConfig = presaleConfig[stageIndex];
            PresaleConfiguration memory newConfig = existingConfig;
            bool allowStartTimeChange = true;

            if (existingConfig.presaleStart > 0 && existingConfig.presaleStart <= block.timestamp) {
                allowStartTimeChange = false;
            }

            if (allowStartTimeChange) {
                newConfig.presaleStart = presaleStages[i].presaleStart;   
            }

            if (presaleStages[i].presaleEnd > newConfig.presaleStart) {
                newConfig.presaleEnd = presaleStages[i].presaleEnd;
            }
            
            newConfig.presaleName = presaleStages[i].presaleName;
            newConfig.presalePrice = presaleStages[i].presalePrice;
            newConfig.presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress = presaleStages[i].presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress;
            newConfig.presaleSupply = presaleStages[i].presaleSupply;
            newConfig.presaleMerkleRoot = presaleStages[i].presaleMerkleRoot;
            
            presaleConfig[stageIndex] = newConfig;

            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit PresaleConfigChanged(_msgSender());
    }

    /// @dev Reduce collection supply
    /// @param _newCollectionSize new collection size to update
    function reduceSupply(uint64 _newCollectionSize) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        if (_newCollectionSize >= config.collectionSize ||
            _newCollectionSize < _totalMinted()
        ) {
            revert Admin_InvalidCollectionSize();
        }

        config.collectionSize = _newCollectionSize;
        emit CollectionSizeReduced(_msgSender(), _newCollectionSize);
    }

    /// @dev Reveal collection artworks
    /// @param collectionURI collection artwork URI
    /// @param extension collection URI extension
    function revealCollection(string memory collectionURI, string memory extension) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        if (config.revealed) {
            revert Collection_Aready_Revealed();
        }

        config.metadataRenderer.updateMetadataBaseWithDetails(address(this), collectionURI, extension, config.metadataRenderer.contractURI(), 0);
        config.revealed = true;
        emit CollectionRevealed(_msgSender());
    }

    function setTradingLock(bool _locked) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        config.lockBeforeMintOut = _locked;
        emit LockTradingStatusChanged(_msgSender(), _locked);
    }

    /// @notice Set new royalty percentage
    /// @param _royaltyBPS new funds recipient address
    function setRoyalty(uint16 _royaltyBPS, address payable _royaltyRecipient) external onlyAdmin {
        if (_royaltyBPS > MAX_ROYALTY_BPS) {
            revert Setup_RoyaltyPercentageTooHigh(MAX_ROYALTY_BPS);
        }

        config.royaltyBPS = _royaltyBPS;
        config.royaltyRecipient = _royaltyRecipient;
        emit RoyaltyChanged(_msgSender(), _royaltyBPS, _royaltyRecipient);
    }

    /// @notice Set a different funds recipient
    /// @param newRecipientAddress new funds recipient address
    function setFundsRecipient(address payable newRecipientAddress) external onlyAdmin {
        config.fundsRecipient = newRecipientAddress;
        emit FundsRecipientChanged(newRecipientAddress, _msgSender());
    }

    /// @notice This withdraws ETH from the contract to the contract owner.
    function withdraw() external nonReentrant {
        address sender = _msgSender();
        uint256 funds = address(this).balance;

        // Check if withdraw is allowed for sender
        if (!hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, sender) && sender != config.fundsRecipient) {
            revert Access_WithdrawNotAllowed();
        }

        // Payout recipient
        (bool successFunds, ) = config.fundsRecipient.call{value: funds, gas: FUNDS_SEND_GAS_LIMIT}("");
        if (!successFunds) {
            revert Withdraw_FundsSendFailure();
        }

        // Emit event for indexing
        emit FundsWithdrawn(_msgSender(), config.fundsRecipient, funds, address(0), 0);
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***      GENERAL GETTER FUNCTIONS      ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/

    /// @notice Simple override for owner interface.
    /// @return user owner address
    function owner() public view override(IERC721Collection, OwnableSkeleton) returns (address) {
        return super.owner();
    }

    /// @notice Contract URI Getter, proxies to metadataRenderer
    /// @return Contract URI
    function contractURI() external view returns (string memory) {
        return config.metadataRenderer.contractURI();
    }

    /// @notice Getter for metadataRenderer contract
    function metadataRenderer() external view returns (IMetadataRenderer) {
        return IMetadataRenderer(config.metadataRenderer);
    }

    /// @notice Token URI Getter, proxies to metadataRenderer
    /// @param tokenId id of token to get URI for
    /// @return Token URI
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) 
        public 
        view 
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (string memory) 
    {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) {
            revert IERC721AUpgradeable.URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        }

        return config.metadataRenderer.tokenURI(tokenId, config.revealed);
    }

    function _payoutFreeeFee(uint256 quantity) internal {
        // Transfer Freee fee to recipient
        (, uint256 FreeeFee) = feeForAmount(quantity);
        (bool success, ) = MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT.call{value: FreeeFee, gas: FUNDS_SEND_GAS_LIMIT}("");
        emit MintFeePayout(FreeeFee, MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT, success);
    }

    /// @notice Internal function to get total minted accross all presale stages
    /// @param minter to get presale counts for
    function _totalPresaleMinted(address minter) internal view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalMintCount = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][1] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][2] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][3] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][4] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][5];

        return totalMintCount;
    }

    /// @notice Checks if the contract supports a given interface
    /// @param interfaceId The interface identifier
    /// @return True if the contract supports the interface, false otherwise
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId)
        public
        view
        override(ERC721ACQueryableInitializable, IERC165, AccessControl)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            super.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC721ACQueryableInitializable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            type(IOwnable).interfaceId == interfaceId ||
            type(IERC2981).interfaceId == interfaceId;
    }

    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual override {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }

    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) canTradeToken {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, _data);
    }

    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) canTradeToken {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    
    function transferFrom(
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) canTradeToken {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (access/AccessControl.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "./IAccessControl.sol";
import "../utils/Context.sol";
import "../utils/Strings.sol";
import "../utils/introspection/ERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Contract module that allows children to implement role-based access
 * control mechanisms. This is a lightweight version that doesn't allow enumerating role
 * members except through off-chain means by accessing the contract event logs. Some
 * applications may benefit from on-chain enumerability, for those cases see
 * {AccessControlEnumerable}.
 *
 * Roles are referred to by their `bytes32` identifier. These should be exposed
 * in the external API and be unique. The best way to achieve this is by
 * using `public constant` hash digests:
 *
 * ```
 * bytes32 public constant MY_ROLE = keccak256("MY_ROLE");
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be used to represent a set of permissions. To restrict access to a
 * function call, use {hasRole}:
 *
 * ```
 * function foo() public {
 *     require(hasRole(MY_ROLE, msg.sender));
 *     ...
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be granted and revoked dynamically via the {grantRole} and
 * {revokeRole} functions. Each role has an associated admin role, and only
 * accounts that have a role's admin role can call {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
 *
 * By default, the admin role for all roles is `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`, which means
 * that only accounts with this role will be able to grant or revoke other
 * roles. More complex role relationships can be created by using
 * {_setRoleAdmin}.
 *
 * WARNING: The `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is also its own admin: it has permission to
 * grant and revoke this role. Extra precautions should be taken to secure
 * accounts that have been granted it.
 */
abstract contract AccessControl is Context, IAccessControl, ERC165 {
    struct RoleData {
        mapping(address => bool) members;
        bytes32 adminRole;
    }

    mapping(bytes32 => RoleData) private _roles;

    bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;

    /**
     * @dev Modifier that checks that an account has a specific role. Reverts
     * with a standardized message including the required role.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
        _checkRole(role);
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IAccessControl).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _roles[role].members[account];
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `_msgSender()` is missing `role`.
     * Overriding this function changes the behavior of the {onlyRole} modifier.
     *
     * Format of the revert message is described in {_checkRole}.
     *
     * _Available since v4.6._
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role) internal view virtual {
        _checkRole(role, _msgSender());
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `account` is missing `role`.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "AccessControl: account ",
                        Strings.toHexString(account),
                        " is missing role ",
                        Strings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) public view virtual override returns (bytes32) {
        return _roles[role].adminRole;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been revoked `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        require(account == _msgSender(), "AccessControl: can only renounce roles for self");

        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event. Note that unlike {grantRole}, this function doesn't perform any
     * checks on the calling account.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     *
     * [WARNING]
     * ====
     * This function should only be called from the constructor when setting
     * up the initial roles for the system.
     *
     * Using this function in any other way is effectively circumventing the admin
     * system imposed by {AccessControl}.
     * ====
     *
     * NOTE: This function is deprecated in favor of {_grantRole}.
     */
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets `adminRole` as ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * Emits a {RoleAdminChanged} event.
     */
    function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
        bytes32 previousAdminRole = getRoleAdmin(role);
        _roles[role].adminRole = adminRole;
        emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function _grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = true;
            emit RoleGranted(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = false;
            emit RoleRevoked(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (security/ReentrancyGuard.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Contract module that helps prevent reentrant calls to a function.
 *
 * Inheriting from `ReentrancyGuard` will make the {nonReentrant} modifier
 * available, which can be applied to functions to make sure there are no nested
 * (reentrant) calls to them.
 *
 * Note that because there is a single `nonReentrant` guard, functions marked as
 * `nonReentrant` may not call one another. This can be worked around by making
 * those functions `private`, and then adding `external` `nonReentrant` entry
 * points to them.
 *
 * TIP: If you would like to learn more about reentrancy and alternative ways
 * to protect against it, check out our blog post
 * https://blog.openzeppelin.com/reentrancy-after-istanbul/[Reentrancy After Istanbul].
 */
abstract contract ReentrancyGuard {
    // Booleans are more expensive than uint256 or any type that takes up a full
    // word because each write operation emits an extra SLOAD to first read the
    // slot's contents, replace the bits taken up by the boolean, and then write
    // back. This is the compiler's defense against contract upgrades and
    // pointer aliasing, and it cannot be disabled.

    // The values being non-zero value makes deployment a bit more expensive,
    // but in exchange the refund on every call to nonReentrant will be lower in
    // amount. Since refunds are capped to a percentage of the total
    // transaction's gas, it is best to keep them low in cases like this one, to
    // increase the likelihood of the full refund coming into effect.
    uint256 private constant _NOT_ENTERED = 1;
    uint256 private constant _ENTERED = 2;

    uint256 private _status;

    constructor() {
        _status = _NOT_ENTERED;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Prevents a contract from calling itself, directly or indirectly.
     * Calling a `nonReentrant` function from another `nonReentrant`
     * function is not supported. It is possible to prevent this from happening
     * by making the `nonReentrant` function external, and making it call a
     * `private` function that does the actual work.
     */
    modifier nonReentrant() {
        _nonReentrantBefore();
        _;
        _nonReentrantAfter();
    }

    function _nonReentrantBefore() private {
        // On the first call to nonReentrant, _status will be _NOT_ENTERED
        require(_status != _ENTERED, "ReentrancyGuard: reentrant call");

        // Any calls to nonReentrant after this point will fail
        _status = _ENTERED;
    }

    function _nonReentrantAfter() private {
        // By storing the original value once again, a refund is triggered (see
        // https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2200)
        _status = _NOT_ENTERED;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "../utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }

    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.22;

import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/utils/CreatorTokenBase.sol";
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/utils/AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721ACQueryableInitializable
 * @dev This contract is not meant for use in Upgradeable Proxy contracts though it may base on Upgradeable contract. The purpose of this
 * contract is for use with EIP-1167 Minimal Proxies (Clones).
 */
abstract contract ERC721ACQueryableInitializable is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    CreatorTokenBase,
    AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval,
    Initializable
{
    /// @notice Initializes the contract with the given name and symbol.
    function __ERC721ACQueryableInitializable_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) public {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();

        _emitDefaultTransferValidator();
        _registerTokenType(getTransferValidator());
    }

    /// @notice Overrides behavior of supportsInterface such that the contract implements the ICreatorToken interface.
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return interfaceId == type(ICreatorToken).interfaceId || interfaceId == type(ICreatorTokenLegacy).interfaceId
            || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /// @notice Returns the function selector for the transfer validator's validation function to be called
    /// @notice for transaction simulation.
    function getTransferValidationFunction() external pure returns (bytes4 functionSignature, bool isViewFunction) {
        functionSignature = bytes4(keccak256("validateTransfer(address,address,address,uint256)"));
        isViewFunction = true;
    }

    /// @notice Overrides behavior of isApprovedFor all such that if an operator is not explicitly approved
    /// @notice for all, the contract owner can optionally auto-approve the 721-C transfer validator for transfers.
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (bool isApproved)
    {
        isApproved = super.isApprovedForAll(owner, operator);

        if (!isApproved) {
            if (autoApproveTransfersFromValidator) {
                isApproved = operator == address(getTransferValidator());
            }
        }
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _beforeTokenTransfers hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity)
        internal
        virtual
        override
    {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity;) {
            _validateBeforeTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _afterTokenTransfer hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _afterTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity)
        internal
        virtual
        override
    {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity;) {
            _validateAfterTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
        return _msgSender();
    }

    function _tokenType() internal pure override returns (uint16) {
        return uint16(721);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import {IMetadataRenderer} from "../interfaces/IMetadataRenderer.sol";

/// @notice Interface for Freee Collection contract
interface IERC721Collection {
    // Enums
    /// @notice Phase type
    enum PhaseType {
        Public,
        Presale,
        Airdrop,
        AdminMint
    }

    // Access errors
    /// @notice Only admin can access this function
    error Access_OnlyAdmin();
    /// @notice Missing the given role or admin access
    error Access_MissingRoleOrAdmin(bytes32 role);
    /// @notice Withdraw is not allowed by this user
    error Access_WithdrawNotAllowed();
    /// @notice Cannot withdraw funds due to ETH send failure.
    error Withdraw_FundsSendFailure();
    /// @notice Call to external metadata renderer failed.
    error ExternalMetadataRenderer_CallFailed();

    // Sale/Purchase errors
    /// @notice Sale is inactive
    error Sale_Inactive();
    /// @notice Presale is inactive
    error Presale_Inactive();
    /// @notice Presale invalid, out of range
    error Presale_Invalid();
    /// @notice Exceed presale stage supply
    error Presale_ExceedStageSupply();
    /// @notice Presale merkle root is invalid
    error Presale_MerkleNotApproved();
    /// @notice Wrong price for purchase
    error Purchase_WrongPrice(uint256 correctPrice);
    /// @notice NFT sold out
    error Mint_SoldOut();
    /// @notice Too many purchase for address
    error Purchase_TooManyForAddress();
    /// @notice Too many presale for address
    error Presale_TooManyForAddress();
    /// @notice Collection already revealed
    error Collection_Aready_Revealed();
    /// @notice Trading locked before mint out
    error Collection_TradingLocked();

    // Admin errors
    /// @notice Presale stage out of supported range
    error Setup_Presale_StageOutOfRange();
    /// @notice Royalty percentage too high
    error Setup_RoyaltyPercentageTooHigh(uint16 maxRoyaltyBPS);
    /// @notice invalid collection size when update
    error Admin_InvalidCollectionSize();

    /// @notice Event emitted for mint fee payout
    /// @param mintFeeAmount amount of the mint fee
    /// @param mintFeeRecipient recipient of the mint fee
    /// @param success if the payout succeeded
    event MintFeePayout(uint256 mintFeeAmount, address mintFeeRecipient, bool success);

    /// @notice Event emitted for each sale
    /// @param phase phase of the sale
    /// @param to address sale was made to
    /// @param quantity quantity of the minted nfts
    /// @param pricePerToken price for each token
    /// @param firstPurchasedTokenId first purchased token ID (to get range add to quantity for max)
    /// @param presaleStage stageIndex of presale stage if applicable, else return 0
    event Sale(PhaseType phase, address indexed to, uint256 indexed quantity, uint256 indexed pricePerToken, uint256 firstPurchasedTokenId, uint256 presaleStage);

    /// @notice Event emitted for each sale
    /// @param sender address sale was made to
    /// @param tokenContract address of the token contract
    /// @param tokenId first purchased token ID (to get range add to quantity for max)
    /// @param quantity quantity of the minted nfts
    /// @param comment caller provided comment
    event MintComment(address indexed sender, address indexed tokenContract, uint256 indexed tokenId, uint256 quantity, string comment);

    /// @notice Contract has been configured and published
    /// @param changedBy Changed by user
    event ContractStatusChanged(address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Sales configuration has been changed
    /// @dev To access new sales configuration, use getter function.
    /// @param changedBy Changed by user
    event PublicSaleConfigChanged(address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Presale config changed
    /// @param changedBy changed by user
    event PresaleConfigChanged(address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Collection size reduced
    /// @param changedBy changed by user
    /// @param newSize new collection size
    event CollectionSizeReduced(address indexed changedBy, uint64 newSize);

    /// @notice event emit when user change the lock trading func
    /// @param changedBy changed by user
    /// @param status new status
    event LockTradingStatusChanged(address indexed changedBy, bool status);

    /// @notice Event emitted when the royalty percentage changed
    /// @param changedBy address that change the royalty
    /// @param newPercentage new royalty percentage
    /// @param newRecipient new royalty recipient
    event RoyaltyChanged(address indexed changedBy, uint256 newPercentage, address newRecipient);

    /// @notice Event emitted when the funds recipient is changed
    /// @param newAddress new address for the funds recipient
    /// @param changedBy address that the recipient is changed by
    event FundsRecipientChanged(address indexed newAddress, address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Event emitted when the funds are withdrawn from the minting contract
    /// @param withdrawnBy address that issued the withdraw
    /// @param withdrawnTo address that the funds were withdrawn to
    /// @param amount amount that was withdrawn
    /// @param feeRecipient user getting withdraw fee (if any)
    /// @param feeAmount amount of the fee getting sent (if any)
    event FundsWithdrawn(address indexed withdrawnBy, address indexed withdrawnTo, uint256 amount, address feeRecipient, uint256 feeAmount);

    /// @notice Collection dynamic metadata changed
    /// @param changedBy address that changed the info
    event DynamicMetadataChanged(address changedBy);

    /// @notice Collection has been revealed
    /// @param revealedBy Revealed by user
    event CollectionRevealed(address indexed revealedBy);

    /// @notice Event emitted when metadata renderer is updated.
    /// @param sender address of the updater
    /// @param renderer new metadata renderer address
    event UpdatedMetadataRenderer(address sender, IMetadataRenderer renderer);

    /// @notice General configuration for NFT Minting and bookkeeping
    struct Configuration {
        /// @dev Metadata renderer
        IMetadataRenderer metadataRenderer;
        /// @dev Max supply of collection
        uint64 collectionSize;
        /// @dev Royalty amount in bps
        uint16 royaltyBPS;
        /// @dev Funds recipient for sale
        address payable fundsRecipient;
        /// @dev Royalty recipient for secondary sale
        address payable royaltyRecipient;
        /// @dev collection reveal status
        bool revealed;
        /// @dev lock trading before mint out
        bool lockBeforeMintOut;
    }

    /// @notice Public sale configuration
    /// @dev Uses 1 storage slot
    struct PublicSaleConfiguration {
        /// @dev Public sale price (max ether value > 1000 ether with this value)
        uint104 publicSalePrice;
        /// @dev Purchase mint limit per address (if set to 0 === unlimited mints)
        uint32 maxSalePurchasePerAddress;
        /// @dev uint64 type allows for dates into 292 billion years
        uint64 publicSaleStart;
        uint64 publicSaleEnd;
        /// @dev Whether public sale is disabled
        bool publicSaleDisabled;
    }

    /// @notice Presale stage configuration
    struct PresaleConfiguration {
        /// @notice Presale stage human readable name
        string presaleName;
        /// @notice Presale start timestamp
        uint64 presaleStart;
        /// @notice Presale end timestamp
        uint64 presaleEnd;
        /// @notice Presale price in ether
        uint104 presalePrice;
        /// @notice Purchase mint limit per address (if set to 0 === unlimited mints)
        uint32 presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress;
        /// @notice supply allocated for presale stage
        uint32 presaleSupply;
        /// @notice amount minted for presale stage
        uint32 presaleMinted;
        /// @notice Presale merkle root
        bytes32 presaleMerkleRoot;
    }

    /// @notice Return type of specific mint counts and details per address
    struct AddressMintDetails {
        /// Number of presale mints for each stage from the given address
        uint256[] presaleMintsByStage;
        /// Number of presale mints from the given address
        uint256 presaleMints;
        /// Number of public mints from the given address
        uint256 publicMints;
        /// Number of total mints from the given address
        uint256 totalMints;
    }

    /// @notice External purchase function (payable in eth)
    /// @param quantity to purchase
    /// @return first minted token ID
    function purchase(uint256 quantity) external payable returns (uint256);

    /// @notice External purchase presale function (takes a merkle proof and matches to root) (payable in eth)
    /// @param stageIndex targetted presale stage
    /// @param quantity to purchase
    /// @param maxQuantity can purchase (verified by merkle root)
    /// @param pricePerToken price per token allowed (verified by merkle root)
    /// @param merkleProof input for merkle proof leaf verified by merkle root
    /// @return first minted token ID
    function purchasePresale(uint256 stageIndex, uint256 quantity, uint256 maxQuantity, uint256 pricePerToken, bytes32[] memory merkleProof) external payable returns (uint256);

    /// @notice Function to return the specific sales details for a given address
    /// @param minter address for minter to return mint information for
    function mintedPerAddress(address minter) external view returns (AddressMintDetails memory);

    /// @notice This is the opensea/public owner setting that can be set by the contract admin
    function owner() external view returns (address);

    /// @notice Admin function to update the public sale configuration settings
    /// @param newConfig updated public stage config
    function setPublicSaleConfiguration(PublicSaleConfiguration memory newConfig) external;

    /// @notice Admin function to update the presale configuration settings
    /// @param newConfig new presale configuration
    function setPresaleConfiguration(PresaleConfiguration[] calldata newConfig) external;

    /// @notice Admin function to reduce collection size (cut suppy)
    /// @param _newCollectionSize new collection size
    function reduceSupply(uint64 _newCollectionSize) external;

    /// @dev Reveal collection artworks
    /// @param collectionURI collection artwork URI
    /// @param extension collection artwork URI extension
    function revealCollection(string memory collectionURI, string memory extension) external;

    /// @notice Update the metadata renderer
    /// @param newRenderer new address for renderer
    /// @param metadataBase data to call to bootstrap data for the new renderer (optional)
    /// @param dynamicMetadataInfo data to call to bootstrap dynamic metadata for the new renderer (optional)
    function setMetadataRenderer(address newRenderer, bytes memory metadataBase, bytes memory dynamicMetadataInfo) external;

    /// @notice This is an admin mint function to mint a quantity to a specific address
    /// @param to address to mint to
    /// @param quantity quantity to mint
    /// @return the id of the first minted NFT
    function adminMint(address to, uint256 quantity) external returns (uint256);

    /// @notice This is an admin mint function to mint a single nft each to a list of addresses
    /// @param to list of addresses to mint an NFT each to
    /// @return the id of the first minted NFT
    function adminMintAirdrop(address[] memory to) external returns (uint256);

    /// @dev Getter for admin role associated with the contract to handle metadata
    /// @return boolean if address is admin
    function isAdmin(address user) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

interface IMetadataRenderer {
    function tokenURI(uint256, bool) external view returns (string memory);
    function contractURI() external view returns (string memory);
    function initializeWithData(bytes memory metadataBase, bytes memory dynamicTokenData) external;
    function updateMetadataBase(
        address collection, 
        string memory baseURI, 
        string memory metadataURI
    ) external;
    function updateMetadataBaseWithDetails(
        address collection, 
        string memory baseURI, 
        string memory extension,
        string memory metadataURI,
        uint256 freezeAt
    ) external;
    function dynamicTokenURI(uint256) external view returns (string memory);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * This ownership interface matches OZ's ownable interface.
 *
 */
interface IOwnable {
    error ONLY_OWNER();
    error ONLY_PENDING_OWNER();

    event OwnershipTransferred(
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed newOwner
    );

    event OwnerPending(
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed potentialNewOwner
    );

    event OwnerCanceled(
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed potentialNewOwner
    );

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() external view returns (address);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

interface IArbInfo {
    function configureAutomaticYield() external;
    function configureVoidYield() external;
    function configureDelegateYield(address delegate) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import {IERC721Collection} from "../interfaces/IERC721Collection.sol";

contract ERC721CollectionStorageV1 {
    /// @notice Configuration for NFT minting contract storage
    IERC721Collection.Configuration public config;

    /// @notice Public sale configuration
    IERC721Collection.PublicSaleConfiguration public publicSaleConfig;

    /// @notice Active presale stage count
    uint256 public activePresaleStageCount;

    /// @notice Presale configuration
    mapping(uint256 => IERC721Collection.PresaleConfiguration) public presaleConfig; 

    /// @dev Mapping for presale mint counts by address and stage
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint256)) public presaleMintedByAddress;

    uint256[50] private __gap;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import {IOwnable} from "../interfaces/IOwnable.sol";

/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * This ownership interface matches OZ's ownable interface.
 */
contract OwnableSkeleton is IOwnable {
    address private _owner;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }

    function _setOwner(address newAddress) internal {
        emit OwnershipTransferred(_owner, newAddress);
        _owner = newAddress;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Address.sol";

abstract contract PublicMulticall {
    /**
     * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data)
        public
        virtual
        returns (bytes[] memory results)
    {
        results = new bytes[](data.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
            results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

contract Version {
    /// @notice The version of the contract
    /// @return The version ID of this contract implementation
    function contractVersion() external pure returns (string memory) {
        return "1.0.0";
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (access/IAccessControl.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IAccessControl {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
     *
     * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
     * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
     * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
     */
    event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
     *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
     *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
     */
    event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);

    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Strings.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "./math/Math.sol";

/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library Strings {
    bytes16 private constant _SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 length = Math.log10(value) + 1;
            string memory buffer = new string(length);
            uint256 ptr;
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
            }
            while (true) {
                ptr--;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), _SYMBOLS))
                }
                value /= 10;
                if (value == 0) break;
            }
            return buffer;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            return toHexString(value, Math.log256(value) + 1);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "./IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165).interfaceId;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../access/OwnablePermissions.sol";
import "../interfaces/ICreatorToken.sol";
import "../interfaces/ICreatorTokenLegacy.sol";
import "../interfaces/ITransferValidator.sol";
import "./TransferValidation.sol";
import "../interfaces/ITransferValidatorSetTokenType.sol";

/**
 * @title CreatorTokenBase
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice CreatorTokenBaseV3 is an abstract contract that provides basic functionality for managing token 
 * transfer policies through an implementation of ICreatorTokenTransferValidator/ICreatorTokenTransferValidatorV2/ICreatorTokenTransferValidatorV3. 
 * This contract is intended to be used as a base for creator-specific token contracts, enabling customizable transfer 
 * restrictions and security policies.
 *
 * <h4>Features:</h4>
 * <ul>Ownable: This contract can have an owner who can set and update the transfer validator.</ul>
 * <ul>TransferValidation: Implements the basic token transfer validation interface.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Benefits:</h4>
 * <ul>Provides a flexible and modular way to implement custom token transfer restrictions and security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Allows creators to enforce policies such as account and codehash blacklists, whitelists, and graylists.</ul>
 * <ul>Can be easily integrated into other token contracts as a base contract.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Intended Usage:</h4>
 * <ul>Use as a base contract for creator token implementations that require advanced transfer restrictions and 
 *   security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Set and update the ICreatorTokenTransferValidator implementation contract to enforce desired policies for the 
 *   creator token.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Compatibility:</h4>
 * <ul>Backward and Forward Compatible - V1/V2/V3 Creator Token Base will work with V1/V2/V3 Transfer Validators.</ul>
 */
abstract contract CreatorTokenBase is OwnablePermissions, TransferValidation, ICreatorToken {

    /// @dev Thrown when setting a transfer validator address that has no deployed code.
    error CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();

    /// @dev The default transfer validator that will be used if no transfer validator has been set by the creator.
    address public constant DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR = address(0x721C0078c2328597Ca70F5451ffF5A7B38D4E947);

    /// @dev Used to determine if the default transfer validator is applied.
    /// @dev Set to true when the creator sets a transfer validator address.
    bool private isValidatorInitialized;
    /// @dev Address of the transfer validator to apply to transactions.
    address private transferValidator;

    constructor() {
        _emitDefaultTransferValidator();
        _registerTokenType(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Sets the transfer validator for the token contract.
     *
     * @dev    Throws when provided validator contract is not the zero address and does not have code.
     * @dev    Throws when the caller is not the contract owner.
     *
     * @dev    <h4>Postconditions:</h4>
     *         1. The transferValidator address is updated.
     *         2. The `TransferValidatorUpdated` event is emitted.
     *
     * @param transferValidator_ The address of the transfer validator contract.
     */
    function setTransferValidator(address transferValidator_) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        bool isValidTransferValidator = transferValidator_.code.length > 0;

        if(transferValidator_ != address(0) && !isValidTransferValidator) {
            revert CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();
        }

        emit TransferValidatorUpdated(address(getTransferValidator()), transferValidator_);

        isValidatorInitialized = true;
        transferValidator = transferValidator_;

        _registerTokenType(transferValidator_);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the transfer validator contract address for this token contract.
     */
    function getTransferValidator() public view override returns (address validator) {
        validator = transferValidator;

        if (validator == address(0)) {
            if (!isValidatorInitialized) {
                validator = DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR;
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Pre-validates a token transfer, reverting if the transfer is not allowed by this token's security policy.
     *      Inheriting contracts are responsible for overriding the _beforeTokenTransfer function, or its equivalent
     *      and calling _validateBeforeTransfer so that checks can be properly applied during token transfers.
     *
     * @dev Be aware that if the msg.sender is the transfer validator, the transfer is automatically permitted, as the
     *      transfer validator is expected to pre-validate the transfer.
     *
     * @dev Throws when the transfer doesn't comply with the collection's transfer policy, if the transferValidator is
     *      set to a non-zero address.
     *
     * @param caller  The address of the caller.
     * @param from    The address of the sender.
     * @param to      The address of the receiver.
     * @param tokenId The token id being transferred.
     */
    function _preValidateTransfer(
        address caller, 
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId, 
        uint256 /*value*/) internal virtual override {
        address validator = getTransferValidator();

        if (validator != address(0)) {
            if (msg.sender == validator) {
                return;
            }

            ITransferValidator(validator).validateTransfer(caller, from, to, tokenId);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Pre-validates a token transfer, reverting if the transfer is not allowed by this token's security policy.
     *      Inheriting contracts are responsible for overriding the _beforeTokenTransfer function, or its equivalent
     *      and calling _validateBeforeTransfer so that checks can be properly applied during token transfers.
     *
     * @dev Be aware that if the msg.sender is the transfer validator, the transfer is automatically permitted, as the
     *      transfer validator is expected to pre-validate the transfer.
     * 
     * @dev Used for ERC20 and ERC1155 token transfers which have an amount value to validate in the transfer validator.
     * @dev The `tokenId` for ERC20 tokens should be set to `0`.
     *
     * @dev Throws when the transfer doesn't comply with the collection's transfer policy, if the transferValidator is
     *      set to a non-zero address.
     *
     * @param caller  The address of the caller.
     * @param from    The address of the sender.
     * @param to      The address of the receiver.
     * @param tokenId The token id being transferred.
     * @param amount  The amount of token being transferred.
     */
    function _preValidateTransfer(
        address caller, 
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId, 
        uint256 amount,
        uint256 /*value*/) internal virtual override {
        address validator = getTransferValidator();

        if (validator != address(0)) {
            if (msg.sender == validator) {
                return;
            }

            ITransferValidator(validator).validateTransfer(caller, from, to, tokenId, amount);
        }
    }

    function _tokenType() internal virtual pure returns(uint16);

    function _registerTokenType(address validator) internal {
        if (validator != address(0)) {
            uint256 validatorCodeSize;
            assembly {
                validatorCodeSize := extcodesize(validator)
            }
            if(validatorCodeSize > 0) {
                try ITransferValidatorSetTokenType(validator).setTokenTypeOfCollection(address(this), _tokenType()) {
                } catch { }
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev  Used during contract deployment for constructable and cloneable creator tokens
     * @dev  to emit the `TransferValidatorUpdated` event signaling the validator for the contract
     * @dev  is the default transfer validator.
     */
    function _emitDefaultTransferValidator() internal {
        emit TransferValidatorUpdated(address(0), DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';

/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }

    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership)
    {
        unchecked {
            if (tokenId >= _startTokenId()) {
                if (tokenId > _sequentialUpTo()) return _ownershipAt(tokenId);

                if (tokenId < _nextTokenId()) {
                    // If the `tokenId` is within bounds,
                    // scan backwards for the initialized ownership slot.
                    while (!_ownershipIsInitialized(tokenId)) --tokenId;
                    return _ownershipAt(tokenId);
                }
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships;
        uint256 i = tokenIds.length;
        assembly {
            // Grab the free memory pointer.
            ownerships := mload(0x40)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(ownerships, i)
            // Allocate one word for the length,
            // `tokenIds.length` words for the pointers.
            i := shl(5, i) // Multiply `i` by 32.
            mstore(0x40, add(add(ownerships, 0x20), i))
        }
        while (i != 0) {
            uint256 tokenId;
            assembly {
                i := sub(i, 0x20)
                tokenId := calldataload(add(tokenIds.offset, i))
            }
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenId);
            assembly {
                // Store the pointer of `ownership` in the `ownerships` array.
                mstore(add(add(ownerships, 0x20), i), ownership)
            }
        }
        return ownerships;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        return _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        // If spot mints are enabled, full-range scan is disabled.
        if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) _revert(NotCompatibleWithSpotMints.selector);
        uint256 start = _startTokenId();
        uint256 stop = _nextTokenId();
        uint256[] memory tokenIds;
        if (start != stop) tokenIds = _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
        return tokenIds;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Helper function for returning an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * Note that this function is optimized for smaller bytecode size over runtime gas,
     * since it is meant to be called off-chain.
     */
    function _tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) private view returns (uint256[] memory tokenIds) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) _revert(InvalidQueryRange.selector);
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) start = _startTokenId();
            uint256 nextTokenId = _nextTokenId();
            // If spot mints are enabled, scan all the way until the specified `stop`.
            uint256 stopLimit = _sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max ? stop : nextTokenId;
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop >= stopLimit) stop = stopLimit;
            // Number of tokens to scan.
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength` to zero if the range contains no tokens.
            if (start >= stop) tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            // If there are one or more tokens to scan.
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength != 0) {
                // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), tokenIdsMaxLength)`.
                if (stop - start <= tokenIdsMaxLength) tokenIdsMaxLength = stop - start;
                uint256 m; // Start of available memory.
                assembly {
                    // Grab the free memory pointer.
                    tokenIds := mload(0x40)
                    // Allocate one word for the length, and `tokenIdsMaxLength` words
                    // for the data. `shl(5, x)` is equivalent to `mul(32, x)`.
                    m := add(tokenIds, shl(5, add(tokenIdsMaxLength, 1)))
                    mstore(0x40, m)
                }
                // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
                // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
                TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
                address currOwnershipAddr;
                // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned),
                // initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
                // `ownership.address` will not be zero,
                // as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
                if (!ownership.burned) currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
                // Use a do-while, which is slightly more efficient for this case,
                // as the array will at least contain one element.
                do {
                    if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) {
                        // Skip the remaining unused sequential slots.
                        if (start == nextTokenId) start = _sequentialUpTo() + 1;
                        // Reset `currOwnershipAddr`, as each spot-minted token is a batch of one.
                        if (start > _sequentialUpTo()) currOwnershipAddr = address(0);
                    }
                    ownership = _ownershipAt(start); // This implicitly allocates memory.
                    assembly {
                        switch mload(add(ownership, 0x40))
                        // if `ownership.burned == false`.
                        case 0 {
                            // if `ownership.addr != address(0)`.
                            // The `addr` already has it's upper 96 bits clearned,
                            // since it is written to memory with regular Solidity.
                            if mload(ownership) {
                                currOwnershipAddr := mload(ownership)
                            }
                            // if `currOwnershipAddr == owner`.
                            // The `shl(96, x)` is to make the comparison agnostic to any
                            // dirty upper 96 bits in `owner`.
                            if iszero(shl(96, xor(currOwnershipAddr, owner))) {
                                tokenIdsIdx := add(tokenIdsIdx, 1)
                                mstore(add(tokenIds, shl(5, tokenIdsIdx)), start)
                            }
                        }
                        // Otherwise, reset `currOwnershipAddr`.
                        // This handles the case of batch burned tokens
                        // (burned bit of first slot set, remaining slots left uninitialized).
                        default {
                            currOwnershipAddr := 0
                        }
                        start := add(start, 1)
                        // Free temporary memory implicitly allocated for ownership
                        // to avoid quadratic memory expansion costs.
                        mstore(0x40, m)
                    }
                } while (!(start == stop || tokenIdsIdx == tokenIdsMaxLength));
                // Store the length of the array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
                }
            }
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../access/OwnablePermissions.sol";

/**
 * @title AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice Base contract mix-in that provides boilerplate code giving the contract owner the
 *         option to automatically approve a 721-C transfer validator implementation for transfers.
 */
abstract contract AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval is OwnablePermissions {

    /// @dev Emitted when the automatic approval flag is modified by the creator.
    event AutomaticApprovalOfTransferValidatorSet(bool autoApproved);

    /// @dev If true, the collection's transfer validator is automatically approved to transfer holder's tokens.
    bool public autoApproveTransfersFromValidator;

    /**
     * @notice Sets if the transfer validator is automatically approved as an operator for all token owners.
     * 
     * @dev    Throws when the caller is not the contract owner.
     * 
     * @param autoApprove If true, the collection's transfer validator will be automatically approved to
     *                    transfer holder's tokens.
     */
    function setAutomaticApprovalOfTransfersFromValidator(bool autoApprove) external {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();
        autoApproveTransfersFromValidator = autoApprove;
        emit AutomaticApprovalOfTransferValidatorSet(autoApprove);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.1) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.2;

import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";

/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;

    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;

    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);

    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the highest version that has been initialized. See {reinitializer}.
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if the contract is currently initializing. See {onlyInitializing}.
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.1;

/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library Address {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.

        return account.code.length > 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");

        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library Math {
    enum Rounding {
        Down, // Toward negative infinity
        Up, // Toward infinity
        Zero // Toward zero
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
     */
    function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
     * zero.
     */
    function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
        return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
     *
     * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds up instead
     * of rounding down.
     */
    function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
        return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or denominator == 0
     * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv)
     * with further edits by Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator
    ) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
        unchecked {
            // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
            // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
            // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
            uint256 prod0; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
            uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
            assembly {
                let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                prod0 := mul(x, y)
                prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
            }

            // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
            if (prod1 == 0) {
                return prod0 / denominator;
            }

            // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
            require(denominator > prod1);

            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // 512 by 256 division.
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////

            // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
            uint256 remainder;
            assembly {
                // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)

                // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
            }

            // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator. Always >= 1.
            // See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.

            // Does not overflow because the denominator cannot be zero at this stage in the function.
            uint256 twos = denominator & (~denominator + 1);
            assembly {
                // Divide denominator by twos.
                denominator := div(denominator, twos)

                // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                prod0 := div(prod0, twos)

                // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
            }

            // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
            prod0 |= prod1 * twos;

            // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
            // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
            // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
            uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;

            // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also works
            // in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256

            // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
            // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
            // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
            // is no longer required.
            result = prod0 * inverse;
            return result;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator,
        Rounding rounding
    ) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
        if (rounding == Rounding.Up && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
            result += 1;
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded down.
     *
     * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }

        // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
        //
        // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
        // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
        //
        // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
        // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
        // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
        //
        // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
        uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);

        // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
        // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
        // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
        // into the expected uint128 result.
        unchecked {
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            return min(result, a / result);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = sqrt(a);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 128;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                value >>= 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                value >>= 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                value >>= 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log2(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >= 10**64) {
                value /= 10**64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >= 10**32) {
                value /= 10**32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >= 10**16) {
                value /= 10**16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >= 10**8) {
                value /= 10**8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >= 10**4) {
                value /= 10**4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >= 10**2) {
                value /= 10**2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >= 10**1) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log10(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 10**result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     *
     * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log256(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << (result * 8) < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

abstract contract OwnablePermissions is Context {
    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ICreatorToken {
    event TransferValidatorUpdated(address oldValidator, address newValidator);
    function getTransferValidator() external view returns (address validator);
    function setTransferValidator(address validator) external;
    function getTransferValidationFunction() external view returns (bytes4 functionSignature, bool isViewFunction);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ICreatorTokenLegacy {
    event TransferValidatorUpdated(address oldValidator, address newValidator);
    function getTransferValidator() external view returns (address validator);
    function setTransferValidator(address validator) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ITransferValidator {
    function applyCollectionTransferPolicy(address caller, address from, address to) external view;
    function validateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to) external view;
    function validateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) external view;
    function validateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) external;

    function beforeAuthorizedTransfer(address operator, address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
    function afterAuthorizedTransfer(address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
    function beforeAuthorizedTransfer(address operator, address token) external;
    function afterAuthorizedTransfer(address token) external;
    function beforeAuthorizedTransfer(address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
    function beforeAuthorizedTransferWithAmount(address token, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) external;
    function afterAuthorizedTransferWithAmount(address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

/**
 * @title TransferValidation
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice A mix-in that can be combined with ERC-721 contracts to provide more granular hooks.
 * Openzeppelin's ERC721 contract only provides hooks for before and after transfer.  This allows
 * developers to validate or customize transfers within the context of a mint, a burn, or a transfer.
 */
abstract contract TransferValidation is Context {
    
    /// @dev Thrown when the from and to address are both the zero address.
    error ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();

    /*************************************************************************/
    /*                      Transfers Without Amounts                        */
    /*************************************************************************/

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _beforeTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateBeforeTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _preValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _afterTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateAfterTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _postValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a mint
    function _preValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a mint
    function _postValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a burn
    function _preValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a burn
    function _postValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a transfer
    function _preValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a transfer
    function _postValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /*************************************************************************/
    /*                         Transfers With Amounts                        */
    /*************************************************************************/

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _beforeTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateBeforeTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else {
            _preValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _afterTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateAfterTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else {
            _postValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a mint
    function _preValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a mint
    function _postValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a burn
    function _preValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a burn
    function _postValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a transfer
    function _preValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a transfer
    function _postValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ITransferValidatorSetTokenType {
    function setTokenTypeOfCollection(address collection, uint16 tokenType) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}

/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * The `_sequentialUpTo()` function can be overriden to enable spot mints
 * (i.e. non-consecutive mints) for `tokenId`s greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;

    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================

    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;

    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;

    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;

    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;

    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;

    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;

    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;

    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;

    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;

    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;

    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;

    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;

    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================

    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }

    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();

        if (_sequentialUpTo() < _startTokenId()) _revert(SequentialUpToTooSmall.selector);
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID for sequential mints.
     *
     * Override this function to change the starting token ID for sequential mints.
     *
     * Note: The value returned must never change after any tokens have been minted.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the maximum token ID (inclusive) for sequential mints.
     *
     * Override this function to return a value less than 2**256 - 1,
     * but greater than `_startTokenId()`, to enable spot (non-sequential) mints.
     *
     * Note: The value returned must never change after any tokens have been minted.
     */
    function _sequentialUpTo() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return type(uint256).max;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256 result) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_burnCounter` cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex + _spotMinted - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            // With spot minting, the intermediate `result` can be temporarily negative,
            // and the computation must be unchecked.
            result = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
            if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) result += ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256 result) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            result = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
            if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) result += ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens that are spot-minted.
     */
    function _totalSpotMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) _revert(BalanceQueryForZeroAddress.selector);
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }

    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(URIQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);

        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }

    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether the ownership slot at `index` is initialized.
     * An uninitialized slot does not necessarily mean that the slot has no owner.
     */
    function _ownershipIsInitialized(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] != 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];

            if (tokenId > _sequentialUpTo()) {
                if (_packedOwnershipExists(packed)) return packed;
                _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
            }

            // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
            if (packed == 0) {
                if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                // Invariant:
                // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // before an unintialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                //
                // We can directly compare the packed value.
                // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                for (;;) {
                    unchecked {
                        packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                    }
                    if (packed == 0) continue;
                    if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
                    // Otherwise, the token is burned, and we must revert.
                    // This handles the case of batch burned tokens, where only the burned bit
                    // of the starting slot is set, and remaining slots are left uninitialized.
                    _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                }
            }
            // Otherwise, the data exists and we can skip the scan.
            // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
            // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
            // If the token is not burned, return `packed`. Otherwise, revert.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
        }
        _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);

        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool result) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            if (tokenId > _sequentialUpTo())
                return _packedOwnershipExists(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId]);

            if (tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                uint256 packed;
                while ((packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId]) == 0) --tokenId;
                result = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0;
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `packed` represents a token that exists.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipExists(uint256 packed) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // The following is equivalent to `owner != address(0) && burned == false`.
            // Symbolically tested.
            result := gt(and(packed, _BITMASK_ADDRESS), and(packed, _BITMASK_BURNED))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        // Mask `from` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        from = address(uint160(uint256(uint160(from)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS));

        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) _revert(TransferFromIncorrectOwner.selector);

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;
        assembly {
            // Emit the `Transfer` event.
            log4(
                0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                from, // `from`.
                toMasked, // `to`.
                tokenId // `tokenId`.
            )
        }
        if (toMasked == 0) _revert(TransferToZeroAddress.selector);

        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
            assembly {
                revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
            }
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;

            if (toMasked == 0) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);

            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            uint256 tokenId = startTokenId;

            if (end - 1 > _sequentialUpTo()) _revert(SequentialMintExceedsLimit.selector);

            do {
                assembly {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                    log4(
                        0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                        0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                        _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                        0, // `address(0)`.
                        toMasked, // `to`.
                        tokenId // `tokenId`.
                    )
                }
                // The `!=` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
            } while (++tokenId != end);

            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) _revert(MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            if (startTokenId + quantity - 1 > _sequentialUpTo()) _revert(SequentialMintExceedsLimit.selector);

            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);

            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);

        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // This prevents reentrancy to `_safeMint`.
                // It does not prevent reentrancy to `_safeMintSpot`.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints a single token at `tokenId`.
     *
     * Note: A spot-minted `tokenId` that has been burned can be re-minted again.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` must be greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     * - `tokenId` must not exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mintSpot(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        if (tokenId <= _sequentialUpTo()) _revert(SpotMintTokenIdTooSmall.selector);
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
        if (_packedOwnershipExists(prevOwnershipPacked)) _revert(TokenAlreadyExists.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, tokenId, 1);

        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // The `numberMinted` for `to` is incremented by 1, and has a max limit of 2**64 - 1.
        // `_spotMinted` is incremented by 1, and has a max limit of 2**256 - 1.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true` (as `quantity == 1`).
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(1) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // Updates:
            // - `balance += 1`.
            // - `numberMinted += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1;

            // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;

            if (toMasked == 0) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);

            assembly {
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    tokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
            }

            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
        }

        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, tokenId, 1);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely mints a single token at `tokenId`.
     *
     * Note: A spot-minted `tokenId` that has been burned can be re-minted again.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}.
     * - `tokenId` must be greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     * - `tokenId` must not exist.
     *
     * See {_mintSpot}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _safeMintSpot(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mintSpot(to, tokenId);

        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 currentSpotMinted = ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
                if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, tokenId, _data)) {
                    _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
                }
                // This prevents reentrancy to `_safeMintSpot`.
                // It does not prevent reentrancy to `_safeMint`.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted != currentSpotMinted) revert();
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMintSpot(to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMintSpot(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _safeMintSpot(to, tokenId, '');
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);

        if (approvalCheck && _msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
            if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                _revert(ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
            }

        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
        }

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Overflow not possible, as `_burnCounter` cannot be exceed `_currentIndex + _spotMinted` times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) _revert(OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData.selector);
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)

            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str

            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }

            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev For more efficient reverts.
     */
    function _revert(bytes4 errorSelector) internal pure {
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, errorSelector)
            revert(0x00, 0x04)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */

import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';

abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;

    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );

        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }

        _;

        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }

    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.1;

/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.

        return account.code.length > 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");

        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();

    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();

    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();

    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();

    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();

    /**
     * `_sequentialUpTo()` must be greater than `_startTokenId()`.
     */
    error SequentialUpToTooSmall();

    /**
     * The `tokenId` of a sequential mint exceeds `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     */
    error SequentialMintExceedsLimit();

    /**
     * Spot minting requires a `tokenId` greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     */
    error SpotMintTokenIdTooSmall();

    /**
     * Cannot mint over a token that already exists.
     */
    error TokenAlreadyExists();

    /**
     * The feature is not compatible with spot mints.
     */
    error NotCompatibleWithSpotMints();

    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================

    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);

    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }

    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================

        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
        // The amount of tokens minted above `_sequentialUpTo()`.
        // We call these spot mints (i.e. non-sequential mints).
        uint256 _spotMinted;
    }

    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');

    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/

library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }

    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');

    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}

Contract Name:
FreeeERC721C

Contract Source Code:

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.22;

import {AccessControl} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/AccessControl.sol";
import {ReentrancyGuard} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/security/ReentrancyGuard.sol";
import {IERC2981, IERC165} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/interfaces/IERC2981.sol";
import {MerkleProof} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import {
    ERC721ACQueryableInitializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AUpgradeable
} from "./creator-token-standards/ERC721ACQueryableInitializable.sol";
import {IERC721Collection} from "./interfaces/IERC721Collection.sol";
import {IMetadataRenderer} from "./interfaces/IMetadataRenderer.sol";
import {IOwnable} from "./interfaces/IOwnable.sol";
import {IArbInfo} from "./interfaces/IArbInfo.sol";
import {ERC721CollectionStorageV1} from "./storage/ERC721CollectionStorageV1.sol";
import {OwnableSkeleton} from "./utils/OwnableSkeleton.sol";
import {PublicMulticall} from "./utils/PublicMulticall.sol";
import {Version} from "./utils/Version.sol";

contract FreeeERC721C is
    ERC721ACQueryableInitializable,
    IERC721Collection,
    IERC2981,
    AccessControl,
    ReentrancyGuard,
    OwnableSkeleton,
    PublicMulticall,
    Version,
    ERC721CollectionStorageV1
{
    /// @dev This is the max mint batch size for the optimized ERC721A mint contract
    uint256 internal immutable MAX_MINT_BATCH_SIZE = 8;

    /// @dev Gas limit to send funds
    uint256 internal immutable FUNDS_SEND_GAS_LIMIT = 210_000;

    /// @dev This is the max number of presale stage allowed
    uint256 internal immutable PRESALE_STAGES_ALLOWED = 5;

    /// @notice Access control roles
    bytes32 public immutable SALES_MANAGER_ROLE = keccak256("SALES_MANAGER");
    

    /// @notice Freee Mint Fee
    uint256 private immutable MINT_FEE;

    /// @notice Mint Fee Recipient
    address payable private immutable MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT;

    /// @notice Max royalty BPS
    uint16 constant MAX_ROYALTY_BPS = 50_00;

    /// @notice Only allow for users with admin access
    modifier onlyAdmin() {
        if (!hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender())) {
            revert Access_OnlyAdmin();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Only a given role has access or admin
    /// @param role role to check for alongside the admin role
    modifier onlyRoleOrAdmin(bytes32 role) {
        if (!hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender()) && !hasRole(role, _msgSender())) {
            revert Access_MissingRoleOrAdmin(role);
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Allows user to mint tokens at a quantity
    modifier canMintTokens(uint256 quantity) {
        if (quantity + _totalMinted() > config.collectionSize) {
            revert Mint_SoldOut();
        }

        _;
    }

    function _presaleActive(uint256 stageIndex) internal view returns (bool) {
        return 
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleStart > 0 && 
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleStart <= block.timestamp && 
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleEnd > block.timestamp;
    }

    function _publicSaleActive() internal view returns (bool) {
        return 
            !publicSaleConfig.publicSaleDisabled &&
            publicSaleConfig.publicSaleStart > 0 &&
            publicSaleConfig.publicSaleStart <= block.timestamp && 
            publicSaleConfig.publicSaleEnd > block.timestamp;
    }

    /// @notice Presale active
    modifier onlyPresaleActive(uint256 stagIndex) {
        if (!_presaleActive(stagIndex)) {
            revert Presale_Inactive();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Public sale active
    modifier onlyPublicSaleActive() {
        if (!_publicSaleActive()) {
            revert Sale_Inactive();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Can transfer token
    modifier canTradeToken() {
        bool mintedOut = uint256(config.collectionSize) == _totalMinted();
        if (config.lockBeforeMintOut && !mintedOut) {
            revert Collection_TradingLocked();
        }

        _;
    }

    /// @notice Getter for last minted token ID (gets next token id and subtracts 1)
    function _lastMintedTokenId() internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _nextTokenId() - 1;
    }

    /// @notice Start token ID for minting (1-100 vs 0-99)
    function _startTokenId() internal pure override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }

    constructor(uint256 _mintFeeAmount, address _mintFeeRecipient) {
        MINT_FEE = _mintFeeAmount;
        MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT = payable(_mintFeeRecipient);
        _disableInitializers();
    }

    /// @notice Initializes the contract
    function initialize(
        string memory _contractName,
        string memory _contractSymbol,
        address _initialOwner,
        address _fundsRecipient,
        uint64 _collectionSize,
        uint16 _royaltyBPS,
        address _royaltyRecipient,
        bytes[] calldata _setupCalls,
        bool _tradingLocked,
        bool _revealed,
        address _escrowHandler
    ) external initializer initializerERC721A {
        __ERC721ACQueryableInitializable_init(_contractName, _contractSymbol);
        _setOwner(_initialOwner);
        if (_escrowHandler == address(0)) {
            // Setup default admin role
            _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _initialOwner);
            config.fundsRecipient = payable(_fundsRecipient);
        } else {
            // Setup default admin role to escrow address
            _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _escrowHandler);
            config.fundsRecipient = payable(_escrowHandler);
            // Set initial owner as sales manager
            _setupRole(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE, _initialOwner);
        }

        // Setup temporary role
        _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, msg.sender);
        // Execute setupCalls
        multicall(_setupCalls);
        // Remove temporary role
        _revokeRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, msg.sender);

        // Setup config variables
        config.collectionSize = _collectionSize;
        config.royaltyBPS = _royaltyBPS;
        config.royaltyRecipient = payable(_royaltyRecipient);
        config.revealed = _revealed;
        config.lockBeforeMintOut = _tradingLocked;

        IArbInfo(0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000065).configureAutomaticYield();

    }

    /// @dev Getter for role associated with the contract to handle metadata
    /// @return boolean if address is admin or sale manager
    function isAdmin(address user) external view returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, user) || hasRole(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE, user);
    }

    /// @param tokenId Token ID to burn
    /// @notice User burn function for token id
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) public {
        _burn(tokenId, true);
    }

    /// @dev Get royalty information for token
    /// @param _salePrice Sale price for the token
    function royaltyInfo(uint256, uint256 _salePrice) external view override returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount) {
        if (config.royaltyRecipient == address(0)) {
            return (config.royaltyRecipient, 0);
        }
        return (config.royaltyRecipient, (_salePrice * config.royaltyBPS) / 10_000);
    }

    /// @dev Number of NFTs the user has minted per address
    /// @param minter to get counts for
    function mintedPerAddress(address minter) external view override returns (IERC721Collection.AddressMintDetails memory) {
        uint256 totalPresaleMints = _totalPresaleMinted(_msgSender());
        uint256[] memory mintsByStage = new uint256[](PRESALE_STAGES_ALLOWED);
        mintsByStage[0] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][1];
        mintsByStage[1] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][2];
        mintsByStage[2] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][3];
        mintsByStage[3] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][4];
        mintsByStage[4] = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][5];
        return
            IERC721Collection.AddressMintDetails({
                presaleMintsByStage: mintsByStage,
                presaleMints: totalPresaleMints,
                publicMints: _numberMinted(minter) - totalPresaleMints,
                totalMints: _numberMinted(minter)
            });
    }

    /// @notice Freee fee is fixed now per mint
    /// @dev Gets the Freee fee for amount of withdraw
    function feeForAmount(uint256 quantity) public view returns (address payable recipient, uint256 fee) {
        recipient = MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT;
        fee = MINT_FEE * quantity;
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***     PUBLIC MINTING FUNCTIONS       ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/

    /**
      @dev This allows the user to purchase collection item
           at the given price in the contract.
     */
    /// @notice Purchase a quantity of tokens
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @return tokenId of the first token minted
    function purchase(uint256 quantity) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPublicSaleActive returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchase(quantity, "");
    }

    /// @notice Purchase a quantity of tokens with a comment
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @param comment comment to include in the IERC721Collection.Sale event
    /// @return tokenId of the first token minted
    function purchaseWithComment(
        uint256 quantity,
        string memory comment
    ) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPublicSaleActive returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchase(quantity, comment);
    }

    function _handlePurchase(uint256 quantity, string memory comment) internal returns (uint256) {
        uint256 salePrice = publicSaleConfig.publicSalePrice;

        if (msg.value != (salePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity) {
            revert Purchase_WrongPrice((salePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity);
        }

        uint256 presaleMinted = _totalPresaleMinted(_msgSender());
        // If max purchase per address == 0 there is no limit.
        // Any other number, the per address mint limit is that.
        if (
            publicSaleConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress != 0 &&
            _numberMinted(_msgSender()) + quantity - presaleMinted > publicSaleConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress
        ) {
            revert Purchase_TooManyForAddress();
        }

        _mintNFTs(_msgSender(), quantity);
        uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - quantity;

        _payoutFreeeFee(quantity);

        emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
            phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.Public,
            to: _msgSender(),
            quantity: quantity,
            pricePerToken: salePrice,
            firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
            presaleStage: 0
        });
        if (bytes(comment).length > 0) {
            emit IERC721Collection.MintComment({
                sender: _msgSender(),
                tokenContract: address(this),
                tokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
                quantity: quantity,
                comment: comment
            });
        }
        return firstMintedTokenId;
    }

    /// @notice Function to mint NFTs
    /// @dev (important: Does not enforce max supply limit, enforce that limit earlier)
    /// @dev This batches in size of 8 as per recommended by ERC721A creators
    /// @param to address to mint NFTs to
    /// @param quantity number of NFTs to mint
    function _mintNFTs(address to, uint256 quantity) internal {
        do {
            uint256 toMint = quantity > MAX_MINT_BATCH_SIZE ? MAX_MINT_BATCH_SIZE : quantity;
            _mint({to: to, quantity: toMint});
            quantity -= toMint;
        } while (quantity > 0);
    }

    /// @notice Merkle-tree based presale purchase function
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @param maxQuantity max quantity that can be purchased via merkle proof #
    /// @param pricePerToken price that each token is purchased at
    /// @param merkleProof proof for presale mint
    function purchasePresale(
        uint256 stageIndex,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 maxQuantity,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        bytes32[] memory merkleProof
    ) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPresaleActive(stageIndex) returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchasePresale(stageIndex, quantity, maxQuantity, pricePerToken, merkleProof, "");
    }

    /// @notice Merkle-tree based presale purchase function with a comment
    /// @param stageIndex targetted presale stage
    /// @param quantity quantity to purchase
    /// @param maxQuantity max quantity that can be purchased via merkle proof #
    /// @param pricePerToken price that each token is purchased at
    /// @param merkleProof proof for presale mint
    /// @param comment comment to include in the IERC721Collection.Sale event
    function purchasePresaleWithComment(
        uint256 stageIndex,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 maxQuantity,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        bytes32[] memory merkleProof,
        string memory comment
    ) external payable nonReentrant canMintTokens(quantity) onlyPresaleActive(stageIndex) returns (uint256) {
        return _handlePurchasePresale(stageIndex, quantity, maxQuantity, pricePerToken, merkleProof, comment);
    }

    function _handlePurchasePresale(
        uint256 stageIndex,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 maxQuantity,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        bytes32[] memory merkleProof,
        string memory comment
    ) internal returns (uint256) {
        if (stageIndex > activePresaleStageCount) {
            revert Presale_Invalid();
        }

        PresaleConfiguration memory saleConfig = presaleConfig[stageIndex];

        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                merkleProof,
                saleConfig.presaleMerkleRoot,
                keccak256(
                    bytes.concat(
                        keccak256(
                            // address, uint256, uint256
                            abi.encode(_msgSender(), maxQuantity, pricePerToken)
                        )
                    )
                )
            )
        ) {
            revert Presale_MerkleNotApproved();
        }

        uint256 presalePrice = saleConfig.presalePrice;
        if (pricePerToken != presalePrice) {
            presalePrice = pricePerToken;
        }
        if (msg.value != (presalePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity) {
            revert Purchase_WrongPrice((presalePrice + MINT_FEE) * quantity);
        }

        uint256 presaleQuantity = saleConfig.presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress;
        if (maxQuantity != presaleQuantity) {
            presaleQuantity = maxQuantity;
        }

        if (presaleMintedByAddress[_msgSender()][stageIndex] + quantity > presaleQuantity) {
            revert Presale_TooManyForAddress();
        }

        bool limitedPresaleSupply = saleConfig.presaleSupply > 0;
        if (limitedPresaleSupply && quantity + saleConfig.presaleMinted > saleConfig.presaleSupply) {
            revert Presale_ExceedStageSupply();
        }

        unchecked {
            presaleMintedByAddress[_msgSender()][stageIndex] += quantity;
            presaleConfig[stageIndex].presaleMinted += uint32(quantity);
        }

        _mintNFTs(_msgSender(), quantity);
        _payoutFreeeFee(quantity);

        uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - quantity;
        emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
            phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.Presale,
            to: _msgSender(),
            quantity: quantity,
            pricePerToken: pricePerToken,
            firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
            presaleStage: stageIndex
        });
        if (bytes(comment).length > 0) {
            emit IERC721Collection.MintComment({
                sender: _msgSender(),
                tokenContract: address(this),
                tokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
                quantity: quantity,
                comment: comment
            });
        }

        return firstMintedTokenId;
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***     ADMIN MINTING FUNCTIONS        ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/

    /// @notice Mint admin
    /// @param recipient recipient to mint to
    /// @param quantity quantity to mint
    function adminMint(address recipient, uint256 quantity) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) canMintTokens(quantity) returns (uint256) {
        _mintNFTs(recipient, quantity);
        uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - quantity;

        emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
            phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.AdminMint,
            to: recipient,
            quantity: quantity,
            pricePerToken: 0,
            firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
            presaleStage: 0
        });

        return _lastMintedTokenId();
    }

    /// @dev This mints a token to the given list of addresses.
    /// @param recipients list of addresses to send the newly minted token to
    function adminMintAirdrop(address[] calldata recipients) external override onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) canMintTokens(recipients.length) returns (uint256) {
        uint256 atId = _nextTokenId();
        uint256 startAt = atId;

        unchecked {
            for (uint256 endAt = atId + recipients.length; atId < endAt; atId++) {
                address recipient = recipients[atId - startAt];
                _mintNFTs(recipient, 1);
                uint256 firstMintedTokenId = _lastMintedTokenId() - 1;

                emit IERC721Collection.Sale({
                    phase: IERC721Collection.PhaseType.Airdrop,
                    to: recipient,
                    quantity: 1,
                    pricePerToken: 0,
                    firstPurchasedTokenId: firstMintedTokenId,
                    presaleStage: 0
                });
            }
        }
        return _lastMintedTokenId();
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***  ADMIN CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS     ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/
    
    /// @dev Set new owner for royalties / opensea
    /// @param newOwner new owner to set
    function setOwner(address newOwner) public onlyAdmin {
        _setOwner(newOwner);
    }

    /// @notice Set a new metadata renderer
    /// @param newRenderer new renderer address to use
    /// @param metadataBase normal metadata to setup new renderer with
    /// @param dynamicMetadataInfo dynamic metadata to setup new renderer with
    function setMetadataRenderer(
        address newRenderer, 
        bytes memory metadataBase, 
        bytes memory dynamicMetadataInfo
    ) public onlyAdmin {
        config.metadataRenderer = IMetadataRenderer(newRenderer);
        (string memory initialBaseURI, string memory initialExtension, string memory initialContractURI) = abi.decode(metadataBase, (string, string, string));
        bytes memory metadataInitializer = abi.encode(initialBaseURI,  initialContractURI);
        config.metadataRenderer.initializeWithData(metadataInitializer, dynamicMetadataInfo);
        if (bytes(initialExtension).length > 0) {            
            config.metadataRenderer.updateMetadataBaseWithDetails(
                address(this), initialBaseURI, initialExtension, initialContractURI, 0
            );
        }

        emit UpdatedMetadataRenderer({sender: _msgSender(), renderer: config.metadataRenderer});
    }

    /// @dev This sets public sale configuration
    /// @param newConfig updated public stage config
    function setPublicSaleConfiguration(PublicSaleConfiguration memory newConfig) public onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        publicSaleConfig.publicSalePrice = newConfig.publicSalePrice;
        publicSaleConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress = newConfig.maxSalePurchasePerAddress;
        publicSaleConfig.publicSaleStart = newConfig.publicSaleStart;
        publicSaleConfig.publicSaleEnd = newConfig.publicSaleEnd;
        publicSaleConfig.publicSaleDisabled = newConfig.publicSaleDisabled;
        emit PublicSaleConfigChanged(_msgSender());
    }

    /// @dev This set presale configuration, use this when init presale stages or when need to remove presale stage
    /// @param presaleStages presale configuration data
    function setPresaleConfiguration(
        IERC721Collection.PresaleConfiguration[] calldata presaleStages
    ) public onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        uint256 stageLength = presaleStages.length;
        if (stageLength > PRESALE_STAGES_ALLOWED) {
            revert Setup_Presale_StageOutOfRange();
        }

        activePresaleStageCount = stageLength;

        for (uint256 i = 0; i < stageLength; ) {
            uint256 stageIndex = i + 1;
            PresaleConfiguration memory existingConfig = presaleConfig[stageIndex];
            PresaleConfiguration memory newConfig = existingConfig;
            bool allowStartTimeChange = true;

            if (existingConfig.presaleStart > 0 && existingConfig.presaleStart <= block.timestamp) {
                allowStartTimeChange = false;
            }

            if (allowStartTimeChange) {
                newConfig.presaleStart = presaleStages[i].presaleStart;   
            }

            if (presaleStages[i].presaleEnd > newConfig.presaleStart) {
                newConfig.presaleEnd = presaleStages[i].presaleEnd;
            }
            
            newConfig.presaleName = presaleStages[i].presaleName;
            newConfig.presalePrice = presaleStages[i].presalePrice;
            newConfig.presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress = presaleStages[i].presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress;
            newConfig.presaleSupply = presaleStages[i].presaleSupply;
            newConfig.presaleMerkleRoot = presaleStages[i].presaleMerkleRoot;
            
            presaleConfig[stageIndex] = newConfig;

            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit PresaleConfigChanged(_msgSender());
    }

    /// @dev Reduce collection supply
    /// @param _newCollectionSize new collection size to update
    function reduceSupply(uint64 _newCollectionSize) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        if (_newCollectionSize >= config.collectionSize ||
            _newCollectionSize < _totalMinted()
        ) {
            revert Admin_InvalidCollectionSize();
        }

        config.collectionSize = _newCollectionSize;
        emit CollectionSizeReduced(_msgSender(), _newCollectionSize);
    }

    /// @dev Reveal collection artworks
    /// @param collectionURI collection artwork URI
    /// @param extension collection URI extension
    function revealCollection(string memory collectionURI, string memory extension) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        if (config.revealed) {
            revert Collection_Aready_Revealed();
        }

        config.metadataRenderer.updateMetadataBaseWithDetails(address(this), collectionURI, extension, config.metadataRenderer.contractURI(), 0);
        config.revealed = true;
        emit CollectionRevealed(_msgSender());
    }

    function setTradingLock(bool _locked) external onlyRoleOrAdmin(SALES_MANAGER_ROLE) {
        config.lockBeforeMintOut = _locked;
        emit LockTradingStatusChanged(_msgSender(), _locked);
    }

    /// @notice Set new royalty percentage
    /// @param _royaltyBPS new funds recipient address
    function setRoyalty(uint16 _royaltyBPS, address payable _royaltyRecipient) external onlyAdmin {
        if (_royaltyBPS > MAX_ROYALTY_BPS) {
            revert Setup_RoyaltyPercentageTooHigh(MAX_ROYALTY_BPS);
        }

        config.royaltyBPS = _royaltyBPS;
        config.royaltyRecipient = _royaltyRecipient;
        emit RoyaltyChanged(_msgSender(), _royaltyBPS, _royaltyRecipient);
    }

    /// @notice Set a different funds recipient
    /// @param newRecipientAddress new funds recipient address
    function setFundsRecipient(address payable newRecipientAddress) external onlyAdmin {
        config.fundsRecipient = newRecipientAddress;
        emit FundsRecipientChanged(newRecipientAddress, _msgSender());
    }

    /// @notice This withdraws ETH from the contract to the contract owner.
    function withdraw() external nonReentrant {
        address sender = _msgSender();
        uint256 funds = address(this).balance;

        // Check if withdraw is allowed for sender
        if (!hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, sender) && sender != config.fundsRecipient) {
            revert Access_WithdrawNotAllowed();
        }

        // Payout recipient
        (bool successFunds, ) = config.fundsRecipient.call{value: funds, gas: FUNDS_SEND_GAS_LIMIT}("");
        if (!successFunds) {
            revert Withdraw_FundsSendFailure();
        }

        // Emit event for indexing
        emit FundsWithdrawn(_msgSender(), config.fundsRecipient, funds, address(0), 0);
    }

    /**
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***                                    ***
     ***      GENERAL GETTER FUNCTIONS      ***
     ***                                    ***
     *** ---------------------------------- ***
     ***/

    /// @notice Simple override for owner interface.
    /// @return user owner address
    function owner() public view override(IERC721Collection, OwnableSkeleton) returns (address) {
        return super.owner();
    }

    /// @notice Contract URI Getter, proxies to metadataRenderer
    /// @return Contract URI
    function contractURI() external view returns (string memory) {
        return config.metadataRenderer.contractURI();
    }

    /// @notice Getter for metadataRenderer contract
    function metadataRenderer() external view returns (IMetadataRenderer) {
        return IMetadataRenderer(config.metadataRenderer);
    }

    /// @notice Token URI Getter, proxies to metadataRenderer
    /// @param tokenId id of token to get URI for
    /// @return Token URI
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) 
        public 
        view 
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (string memory) 
    {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) {
            revert IERC721AUpgradeable.URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        }

        return config.metadataRenderer.tokenURI(tokenId, config.revealed);
    }

    function _payoutFreeeFee(uint256 quantity) internal {
        // Transfer Freee fee to recipient
        (, uint256 FreeeFee) = feeForAmount(quantity);
        (bool success, ) = MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT.call{value: FreeeFee, gas: FUNDS_SEND_GAS_LIMIT}("");
        emit MintFeePayout(FreeeFee, MINT_FEE_RECIPIENT, success);
    }

    /// @notice Internal function to get total minted accross all presale stages
    /// @param minter to get presale counts for
    function _totalPresaleMinted(address minter) internal view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalMintCount = presaleMintedByAddress[minter][1] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][2] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][3] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][4] +
            presaleMintedByAddress[minter][5];

        return totalMintCount;
    }

    /// @notice Checks if the contract supports a given interface
    /// @param interfaceId The interface identifier
    /// @return True if the contract supports the interface, false otherwise
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId)
        public
        view
        override(ERC721ACQueryableInitializable, IERC165, AccessControl)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            super.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC721ACQueryableInitializable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            type(IOwnable).interfaceId == interfaceId ||
            type(IERC2981).interfaceId == interfaceId;
    }

    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual override {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }

    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) canTradeToken {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, _data);
    }

    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) canTradeToken {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    
    function transferFrom(
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) canTradeToken {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (access/AccessControl.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "./IAccessControl.sol";
import "../utils/Context.sol";
import "../utils/Strings.sol";
import "../utils/introspection/ERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Contract module that allows children to implement role-based access
 * control mechanisms. This is a lightweight version that doesn't allow enumerating role
 * members except through off-chain means by accessing the contract event logs. Some
 * applications may benefit from on-chain enumerability, for those cases see
 * {AccessControlEnumerable}.
 *
 * Roles are referred to by their `bytes32` identifier. These should be exposed
 * in the external API and be unique. The best way to achieve this is by
 * using `public constant` hash digests:
 *
 * ```
 * bytes32 public constant MY_ROLE = keccak256("MY_ROLE");
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be used to represent a set of permissions. To restrict access to a
 * function call, use {hasRole}:
 *
 * ```
 * function foo() public {
 *     require(hasRole(MY_ROLE, msg.sender));
 *     ...
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be granted and revoked dynamically via the {grantRole} and
 * {revokeRole} functions. Each role has an associated admin role, and only
 * accounts that have a role's admin role can call {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
 *
 * By default, the admin role for all roles is `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`, which means
 * that only accounts with this role will be able to grant or revoke other
 * roles. More complex role relationships can be created by using
 * {_setRoleAdmin}.
 *
 * WARNING: The `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is also its own admin: it has permission to
 * grant and revoke this role. Extra precautions should be taken to secure
 * accounts that have been granted it.
 */
abstract contract AccessControl is Context, IAccessControl, ERC165 {
    struct RoleData {
        mapping(address => bool) members;
        bytes32 adminRole;
    }

    mapping(bytes32 => RoleData) private _roles;

    bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;

    /**
     * @dev Modifier that checks that an account has a specific role. Reverts
     * with a standardized message including the required role.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
        _checkRole(role);
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IAccessControl).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _roles[role].members[account];
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `_msgSender()` is missing `role`.
     * Overriding this function changes the behavior of the {onlyRole} modifier.
     *
     * Format of the revert message is described in {_checkRole}.
     *
     * _Available since v4.6._
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role) internal view virtual {
        _checkRole(role, _msgSender());
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `account` is missing `role`.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "AccessControl: account ",
                        Strings.toHexString(account),
                        " is missing role ",
                        Strings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) public view virtual override returns (bytes32) {
        return _roles[role].adminRole;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been revoked `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        require(account == _msgSender(), "AccessControl: can only renounce roles for self");

        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event. Note that unlike {grantRole}, this function doesn't perform any
     * checks on the calling account.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     *
     * [WARNING]
     * ====
     * This function should only be called from the constructor when setting
     * up the initial roles for the system.
     *
     * Using this function in any other way is effectively circumventing the admin
     * system imposed by {AccessControl}.
     * ====
     *
     * NOTE: This function is deprecated in favor of {_grantRole}.
     */
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets `adminRole` as ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * Emits a {RoleAdminChanged} event.
     */
    function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
        bytes32 previousAdminRole = getRoleAdmin(role);
        _roles[role].adminRole = adminRole;
        emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function _grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = true;
            emit RoleGranted(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = false;
            emit RoleRevoked(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (security/ReentrancyGuard.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Contract module that helps prevent reentrant calls to a function.
 *
 * Inheriting from `ReentrancyGuard` will make the {nonReentrant} modifier
 * available, which can be applied to functions to make sure there are no nested
 * (reentrant) calls to them.
 *
 * Note that because there is a single `nonReentrant` guard, functions marked as
 * `nonReentrant` may not call one another. This can be worked around by making
 * those functions `private`, and then adding `external` `nonReentrant` entry
 * points to them.
 *
 * TIP: If you would like to learn more about reentrancy and alternative ways
 * to protect against it, check out our blog post
 * https://blog.openzeppelin.com/reentrancy-after-istanbul/[Reentrancy After Istanbul].
 */
abstract contract ReentrancyGuard {
    // Booleans are more expensive than uint256 or any type that takes up a full
    // word because each write operation emits an extra SLOAD to first read the
    // slot's contents, replace the bits taken up by the boolean, and then write
    // back. This is the compiler's defense against contract upgrades and
    // pointer aliasing, and it cannot be disabled.

    // The values being non-zero value makes deployment a bit more expensive,
    // but in exchange the refund on every call to nonReentrant will be lower in
    // amount. Since refunds are capped to a percentage of the total
    // transaction's gas, it is best to keep them low in cases like this one, to
    // increase the likelihood of the full refund coming into effect.
    uint256 private constant _NOT_ENTERED = 1;
    uint256 private constant _ENTERED = 2;

    uint256 private _status;

    constructor() {
        _status = _NOT_ENTERED;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Prevents a contract from calling itself, directly or indirectly.
     * Calling a `nonReentrant` function from another `nonReentrant`
     * function is not supported. It is possible to prevent this from happening
     * by making the `nonReentrant` function external, and making it call a
     * `private` function that does the actual work.
     */
    modifier nonReentrant() {
        _nonReentrantBefore();
        _;
        _nonReentrantAfter();
    }

    function _nonReentrantBefore() private {
        // On the first call to nonReentrant, _status will be _NOT_ENTERED
        require(_status != _ENTERED, "ReentrancyGuard: reentrant call");

        // Any calls to nonReentrant after this point will fail
        _status = _ENTERED;
    }

    function _nonReentrantAfter() private {
        // By storing the original value once again, a refund is triggered (see
        // https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2200)
        _status = _NOT_ENTERED;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "../utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }

    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.22;

import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/utils/CreatorTokenBase.sol";
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/utils/AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721ACQueryableInitializable
 * @dev This contract is not meant for use in Upgradeable Proxy contracts though it may base on Upgradeable contract. The purpose of this
 * contract is for use with EIP-1167 Minimal Proxies (Clones).
 */
abstract contract ERC721ACQueryableInitializable is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    CreatorTokenBase,
    AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval,
    Initializable
{
    /// @notice Initializes the contract with the given name and symbol.
    function __ERC721ACQueryableInitializable_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) public {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();

        _emitDefaultTransferValidator();
        _registerTokenType(getTransferValidator());
    }

    /// @notice Overrides behavior of supportsInterface such that the contract implements the ICreatorToken interface.
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return interfaceId == type(ICreatorToken).interfaceId || interfaceId == type(ICreatorTokenLegacy).interfaceId
            || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /// @notice Returns the function selector for the transfer validator's validation function to be called
    /// @notice for transaction simulation.
    function getTransferValidationFunction() external pure returns (bytes4 functionSignature, bool isViewFunction) {
        functionSignature = bytes4(keccak256("validateTransfer(address,address,address,uint256)"));
        isViewFunction = true;
    }

    /// @notice Overrides behavior of isApprovedFor all such that if an operator is not explicitly approved
    /// @notice for all, the contract owner can optionally auto-approve the 721-C transfer validator for transfers.
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (bool isApproved)
    {
        isApproved = super.isApprovedForAll(owner, operator);

        if (!isApproved) {
            if (autoApproveTransfersFromValidator) {
                isApproved = operator == address(getTransferValidator());
            }
        }
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _beforeTokenTransfers hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity)
        internal
        virtual
        override
    {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity;) {
            _validateBeforeTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _afterTokenTransfer hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _afterTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity)
        internal
        virtual
        override
    {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity;) {
            _validateAfterTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
        return _msgSender();
    }

    function _tokenType() internal pure override returns (uint16) {
        return uint16(721);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import {IMetadataRenderer} from "../interfaces/IMetadataRenderer.sol";

/// @notice Interface for Freee Collection contract
interface IERC721Collection {
    // Enums
    /// @notice Phase type
    enum PhaseType {
        Public,
        Presale,
        Airdrop,
        AdminMint
    }

    // Access errors
    /// @notice Only admin can access this function
    error Access_OnlyAdmin();
    /// @notice Missing the given role or admin access
    error Access_MissingRoleOrAdmin(bytes32 role);
    /// @notice Withdraw is not allowed by this user
    error Access_WithdrawNotAllowed();
    /// @notice Cannot withdraw funds due to ETH send failure.
    error Withdraw_FundsSendFailure();
    /// @notice Call to external metadata renderer failed.
    error ExternalMetadataRenderer_CallFailed();

    // Sale/Purchase errors
    /// @notice Sale is inactive
    error Sale_Inactive();
    /// @notice Presale is inactive
    error Presale_Inactive();
    /// @notice Presale invalid, out of range
    error Presale_Invalid();
    /// @notice Exceed presale stage supply
    error Presale_ExceedStageSupply();
    /// @notice Presale merkle root is invalid
    error Presale_MerkleNotApproved();
    /// @notice Wrong price for purchase
    error Purchase_WrongPrice(uint256 correctPrice);
    /// @notice NFT sold out
    error Mint_SoldOut();
    /// @notice Too many purchase for address
    error Purchase_TooManyForAddress();
    /// @notice Too many presale for address
    error Presale_TooManyForAddress();
    /// @notice Collection already revealed
    error Collection_Aready_Revealed();
    /// @notice Trading locked before mint out
    error Collection_TradingLocked();

    // Admin errors
    /// @notice Presale stage out of supported range
    error Setup_Presale_StageOutOfRange();
    /// @notice Royalty percentage too high
    error Setup_RoyaltyPercentageTooHigh(uint16 maxRoyaltyBPS);
    /// @notice invalid collection size when update
    error Admin_InvalidCollectionSize();

    /// @notice Event emitted for mint fee payout
    /// @param mintFeeAmount amount of the mint fee
    /// @param mintFeeRecipient recipient of the mint fee
    /// @param success if the payout succeeded
    event MintFeePayout(uint256 mintFeeAmount, address mintFeeRecipient, bool success);

    /// @notice Event emitted for each sale
    /// @param phase phase of the sale
    /// @param to address sale was made to
    /// @param quantity quantity of the minted nfts
    /// @param pricePerToken price for each token
    /// @param firstPurchasedTokenId first purchased token ID (to get range add to quantity for max)
    /// @param presaleStage stageIndex of presale stage if applicable, else return 0
    event Sale(PhaseType phase, address indexed to, uint256 indexed quantity, uint256 indexed pricePerToken, uint256 firstPurchasedTokenId, uint256 presaleStage);

    /// @notice Event emitted for each sale
    /// @param sender address sale was made to
    /// @param tokenContract address of the token contract
    /// @param tokenId first purchased token ID (to get range add to quantity for max)
    /// @param quantity quantity of the minted nfts
    /// @param comment caller provided comment
    event MintComment(address indexed sender, address indexed tokenContract, uint256 indexed tokenId, uint256 quantity, string comment);

    /// @notice Contract has been configured and published
    /// @param changedBy Changed by user
    event ContractStatusChanged(address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Sales configuration has been changed
    /// @dev To access new sales configuration, use getter function.
    /// @param changedBy Changed by user
    event PublicSaleConfigChanged(address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Presale config changed
    /// @param changedBy changed by user
    event PresaleConfigChanged(address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Collection size reduced
    /// @param changedBy changed by user
    /// @param newSize new collection size
    event CollectionSizeReduced(address indexed changedBy, uint64 newSize);

    /// @notice event emit when user change the lock trading func
    /// @param changedBy changed by user
    /// @param status new status
    event LockTradingStatusChanged(address indexed changedBy, bool status);

    /// @notice Event emitted when the royalty percentage changed
    /// @param changedBy address that change the royalty
    /// @param newPercentage new royalty percentage
    /// @param newRecipient new royalty recipient
    event RoyaltyChanged(address indexed changedBy, uint256 newPercentage, address newRecipient);

    /// @notice Event emitted when the funds recipient is changed
    /// @param newAddress new address for the funds recipient
    /// @param changedBy address that the recipient is changed by
    event FundsRecipientChanged(address indexed newAddress, address indexed changedBy);

    /// @notice Event emitted when the funds are withdrawn from the minting contract
    /// @param withdrawnBy address that issued the withdraw
    /// @param withdrawnTo address that the funds were withdrawn to
    /// @param amount amount that was withdrawn
    /// @param feeRecipient user getting withdraw fee (if any)
    /// @param feeAmount amount of the fee getting sent (if any)
    event FundsWithdrawn(address indexed withdrawnBy, address indexed withdrawnTo, uint256 amount, address feeRecipient, uint256 feeAmount);

    /// @notice Collection dynamic metadata changed
    /// @param changedBy address that changed the info
    event DynamicMetadataChanged(address changedBy);

    /// @notice Collection has been revealed
    /// @param revealedBy Revealed by user
    event CollectionRevealed(address indexed revealedBy);

    /// @notice Event emitted when metadata renderer is updated.
    /// @param sender address of the updater
    /// @param renderer new metadata renderer address
    event UpdatedMetadataRenderer(address sender, IMetadataRenderer renderer);

    /// @notice General configuration for NFT Minting and bookkeeping
    struct Configuration {
        /// @dev Metadata renderer
        IMetadataRenderer metadataRenderer;
        /// @dev Max supply of collection
        uint64 collectionSize;
        /// @dev Royalty amount in bps
        uint16 royaltyBPS;
        /// @dev Funds recipient for sale
        address payable fundsRecipient;
        /// @dev Royalty recipient for secondary sale
        address payable royaltyRecipient;
        /// @dev collection reveal status
        bool revealed;
        /// @dev lock trading before mint out
        bool lockBeforeMintOut;
    }

    /// @notice Public sale configuration
    /// @dev Uses 1 storage slot
    struct PublicSaleConfiguration {
        /// @dev Public sale price (max ether value > 1000 ether with this value)
        uint104 publicSalePrice;
        /// @dev Purchase mint limit per address (if set to 0 === unlimited mints)
        uint32 maxSalePurchasePerAddress;
        /// @dev uint64 type allows for dates into 292 billion years
        uint64 publicSaleStart;
        uint64 publicSaleEnd;
        /// @dev Whether public sale is disabled
        bool publicSaleDisabled;
    }

    /// @notice Presale stage configuration
    struct PresaleConfiguration {
        /// @notice Presale stage human readable name
        string presaleName;
        /// @notice Presale start timestamp
        uint64 presaleStart;
        /// @notice Presale end timestamp
        uint64 presaleEnd;
        /// @notice Presale price in ether
        uint104 presalePrice;
        /// @notice Purchase mint limit per address (if set to 0 === unlimited mints)
        uint32 presaleMaxPurchasePerAddress;
        /// @notice supply allocated for presale stage
        uint32 presaleSupply;
        /// @notice amount minted for presale stage
        uint32 presaleMinted;
        /// @notice Presale merkle root
        bytes32 presaleMerkleRoot;
    }

    /// @notice Return type of specific mint counts and details per address
    struct AddressMintDetails {
        /// Number of presale mints for each stage from the given address
        uint256[] presaleMintsByStage;
        /// Number of presale mints from the given address
        uint256 presaleMints;
        /// Number of public mints from the given address
        uint256 publicMints;
        /// Number of total mints from the given address
        uint256 totalMints;
    }

    /// @notice External purchase function (payable in eth)
    /// @param quantity to purchase
    /// @return first minted token ID
    function purchase(uint256 quantity) external payable returns (uint256);

    /// @notice External purchase presale function (takes a merkle proof and matches to root) (payable in eth)
    /// @param stageIndex targetted presale stage
    /// @param quantity to purchase
    /// @param maxQuantity can purchase (verified by merkle root)
    /// @param pricePerToken price per token allowed (verified by merkle root)
    /// @param merkleProof input for merkle proof leaf verified by merkle root
    /// @return first minted token ID
    function purchasePresale(uint256 stageIndex, uint256 quantity, uint256 maxQuantity, uint256 pricePerToken, bytes32[] memory merkleProof) external payable returns (uint256);

    /// @notice Function to return the specific sales details for a given address
    /// @param minter address for minter to return mint information for
    function mintedPerAddress(address minter) external view returns (AddressMintDetails memory);

    /// @notice This is the opensea/public owner setting that can be set by the contract admin
    function owner() external view returns (address);

    /// @notice Admin function to update the public sale configuration settings
    /// @param newConfig updated public stage config
    function setPublicSaleConfiguration(PublicSaleConfiguration memory newConfig) external;

    /// @notice Admin function to update the presale configuration settings
    /// @param newConfig new presale configuration
    function setPresaleConfiguration(PresaleConfiguration[] calldata newConfig) external;

    /// @notice Admin function to reduce collection size (cut suppy)
    /// @param _newCollectionSize new collection size
    function reduceSupply(uint64 _newCollectionSize) external;

    /// @dev Reveal collection artworks
    /// @param collectionURI collection artwork URI
    /// @param extension collection artwork URI extension
    function revealCollection(string memory collectionURI, string memory extension) external;

    /// @notice Update the metadata renderer
    /// @param newRenderer new address for renderer
    /// @param metadataBase data to call to bootstrap data for the new renderer (optional)
    /// @param dynamicMetadataInfo data to call to bootstrap dynamic metadata for the new renderer (optional)
    function setMetadataRenderer(address newRenderer, bytes memory metadataBase, bytes memory dynamicMetadataInfo) external;

    /// @notice This is an admin mint function to mint a quantity to a specific address
    /// @param to address to mint to
    /// @param quantity quantity to mint
    /// @return the id of the first minted NFT
    function adminMint(address to, uint256 quantity) external returns (uint256);

    /// @notice This is an admin mint function to mint a single nft each to a list of addresses
    /// @param to list of addresses to mint an NFT each to
    /// @return the id of the first minted NFT
    function adminMintAirdrop(address[] memory to) external returns (uint256);

    /// @dev Getter for admin role associated with the contract to handle metadata
    /// @return boolean if address is admin
    function isAdmin(address user) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

interface IMetadataRenderer {
    function tokenURI(uint256, bool) external view returns (string memory);
    function contractURI() external view returns (string memory);
    function initializeWithData(bytes memory metadataBase, bytes memory dynamicTokenData) external;
    function updateMetadataBase(
        address collection, 
        string memory baseURI, 
        string memory metadataURI
    ) external;
    function updateMetadataBaseWithDetails(
        address collection, 
        string memory baseURI, 
        string memory extension,
        string memory metadataURI,
        uint256 freezeAt
    ) external;
    function dynamicTokenURI(uint256) external view returns (string memory);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * This ownership interface matches OZ's ownable interface.
 *
 */
interface IOwnable {
    error ONLY_OWNER();
    error ONLY_PENDING_OWNER();

    event OwnershipTransferred(
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed newOwner
    );

    event OwnerPending(
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed potentialNewOwner
    );

    event OwnerCanceled(
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed potentialNewOwner
    );

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() external view returns (address);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

interface IArbInfo {
    function configureAutomaticYield() external;
    function configureVoidYield() external;
    function configureDelegateYield(address delegate) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import {IERC721Collection} from "../interfaces/IERC721Collection.sol";

contract ERC721CollectionStorageV1 {
    /// @notice Configuration for NFT minting contract storage
    IERC721Collection.Configuration public config;

    /// @notice Public sale configuration
    IERC721Collection.PublicSaleConfiguration public publicSaleConfig;

    /// @notice Active presale stage count
    uint256 public activePresaleStageCount;

    /// @notice Presale configuration
    mapping(uint256 => IERC721Collection.PresaleConfiguration) public presaleConfig; 

    /// @dev Mapping for presale mint counts by address and stage
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint256)) public presaleMintedByAddress;

    uint256[50] private __gap;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import {IOwnable} from "../interfaces/IOwnable.sol";

/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * This ownership interface matches OZ's ownable interface.
 */
contract OwnableSkeleton is IOwnable {
    address private _owner;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }

    function _setOwner(address newAddress) internal {
        emit OwnershipTransferred(_owner, newAddress);
        _owner = newAddress;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Address.sol";

abstract contract PublicMulticall {
    /**
     * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data)
        public
        virtual
        returns (bytes[] memory results)
    {
        results = new bytes[](data.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
            results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;

contract Version {
    /// @notice The version of the contract
    /// @return The version ID of this contract implementation
    function contractVersion() external pure returns (string memory) {
        return "1.0.0";
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (access/IAccessControl.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IAccessControl {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
     *
     * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
     * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
     * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
     */
    event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
     *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
     *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
     */
    event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);

    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);

    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;

    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Strings.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "./math/Math.sol";

/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library Strings {
    bytes16 private constant _SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 length = Math.log10(value) + 1;
            string memory buffer = new string(length);
            uint256 ptr;
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
            }
            while (true) {
                ptr--;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), _SYMBOLS))
                }
                value /= 10;
                if (value == 0) break;
            }
            return buffer;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            return toHexString(value, Math.log256(value) + 1);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

import "./IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165).interfaceId;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../access/OwnablePermissions.sol";
import "../interfaces/ICreatorToken.sol";
import "../interfaces/ICreatorTokenLegacy.sol";
import "../interfaces/ITransferValidator.sol";
import "./TransferValidation.sol";
import "../interfaces/ITransferValidatorSetTokenType.sol";

/**
 * @title CreatorTokenBase
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice CreatorTokenBaseV3 is an abstract contract that provides basic functionality for managing token 
 * transfer policies through an implementation of ICreatorTokenTransferValidator/ICreatorTokenTransferValidatorV2/ICreatorTokenTransferValidatorV3. 
 * This contract is intended to be used as a base for creator-specific token contracts, enabling customizable transfer 
 * restrictions and security policies.
 *
 * <h4>Features:</h4>
 * <ul>Ownable: This contract can have an owner who can set and update the transfer validator.</ul>
 * <ul>TransferValidation: Implements the basic token transfer validation interface.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Benefits:</h4>
 * <ul>Provides a flexible and modular way to implement custom token transfer restrictions and security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Allows creators to enforce policies such as account and codehash blacklists, whitelists, and graylists.</ul>
 * <ul>Can be easily integrated into other token contracts as a base contract.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Intended Usage:</h4>
 * <ul>Use as a base contract for creator token implementations that require advanced transfer restrictions and 
 *   security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Set and update the ICreatorTokenTransferValidator implementation contract to enforce desired policies for the 
 *   creator token.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Compatibility:</h4>
 * <ul>Backward and Forward Compatible - V1/V2/V3 Creator Token Base will work with V1/V2/V3 Transfer Validators.</ul>
 */
abstract contract CreatorTokenBase is OwnablePermissions, TransferValidation, ICreatorToken {

    /// @dev Thrown when setting a transfer validator address that has no deployed code.
    error CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();

    /// @dev The default transfer validator that will be used if no transfer validator has been set by the creator.
    address public constant DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR = address(0x721C0078c2328597Ca70F5451ffF5A7B38D4E947);

    /// @dev Used to determine if the default transfer validator is applied.
    /// @dev Set to true when the creator sets a transfer validator address.
    bool private isValidatorInitialized;
    /// @dev Address of the transfer validator to apply to transactions.
    address private transferValidator;

    constructor() {
        _emitDefaultTransferValidator();
        _registerTokenType(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Sets the transfer validator for the token contract.
     *
     * @dev    Throws when provided validator contract is not the zero address and does not have code.
     * @dev    Throws when the caller is not the contract owner.
     *
     * @dev    <h4>Postconditions:</h4>
     *         1. The transferValidator address is updated.
     *         2. The `TransferValidatorUpdated` event is emitted.
     *
     * @param transferValidator_ The address of the transfer validator contract.
     */
    function setTransferValidator(address transferValidator_) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        bool isValidTransferValidator = transferValidator_.code.length > 0;

        if(transferValidator_ != address(0) && !isValidTransferValidator) {
            revert CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();
        }

        emit TransferValidatorUpdated(address(getTransferValidator()), transferValidator_);

        isValidatorInitialized = true;
        transferValidator = transferValidator_;

        _registerTokenType(transferValidator_);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the transfer validator contract address for this token contract.
     */
    function getTransferValidator() public view override returns (address validator) {
        validator = transferValidator;

        if (validator == address(0)) {
            if (!isValidatorInitialized) {
                validator = DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR;
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Pre-validates a token transfer, reverting if the transfer is not allowed by this token's security policy.
     *      Inheriting contracts are responsible for overriding the _beforeTokenTransfer function, or its equivalent
     *      and calling _validateBeforeTransfer so that checks can be properly applied during token transfers.
     *
     * @dev Be aware that if the msg.sender is the transfer validator, the transfer is automatically permitted, as the
     *      transfer validator is expected to pre-validate the transfer.
     *
     * @dev Throws when the transfer doesn't comply with the collection's transfer policy, if the transferValidator is
     *      set to a non-zero address.
     *
     * @param caller  The address of the caller.
     * @param from    The address of the sender.
     * @param to      The address of the receiver.
     * @param tokenId The token id being transferred.
     */
    function _preValidateTransfer(
        address caller, 
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId, 
        uint256 /*value*/) internal virtual override {
        address validator = getTransferValidator();

        if (validator != address(0)) {
            if (msg.sender == validator) {
                return;
            }

            ITransferValidator(validator).validateTransfer(caller, from, to, tokenId);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Pre-validates a token transfer, reverting if the transfer is not allowed by this token's security policy.
     *      Inheriting contracts are responsible for overriding the _beforeTokenTransfer function, or its equivalent
     *      and calling _validateBeforeTransfer so that checks can be properly applied during token transfers.
     *
     * @dev Be aware that if the msg.sender is the transfer validator, the transfer is automatically permitted, as the
     *      transfer validator is expected to pre-validate the transfer.
     * 
     * @dev Used for ERC20 and ERC1155 token transfers which have an amount value to validate in the transfer validator.
     * @dev The `tokenId` for ERC20 tokens should be set to `0`.
     *
     * @dev Throws when the transfer doesn't comply with the collection's transfer policy, if the transferValidator is
     *      set to a non-zero address.
     *
     * @param caller  The address of the caller.
     * @param from    The address of the sender.
     * @param to      The address of the receiver.
     * @param tokenId The token id being transferred.
     * @param amount  The amount of token being transferred.
     */
    function _preValidateTransfer(
        address caller, 
        address from, 
        address to, 
        uint256 tokenId, 
        uint256 amount,
        uint256 /*value*/) internal virtual override {
        address validator = getTransferValidator();

        if (validator != address(0)) {
            if (msg.sender == validator) {
                return;
            }

            ITransferValidator(validator).validateTransfer(caller, from, to, tokenId, amount);
        }
    }

    function _tokenType() internal virtual pure returns(uint16);

    function _registerTokenType(address validator) internal {
        if (validator != address(0)) {
            uint256 validatorCodeSize;
            assembly {
                validatorCodeSize := extcodesize(validator)
            }
            if(validatorCodeSize > 0) {
                try ITransferValidatorSetTokenType(validator).setTokenTypeOfCollection(address(this), _tokenType()) {
                } catch { }
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev  Used during contract deployment for constructable and cloneable creator tokens
     * @dev  to emit the `TransferValidatorUpdated` event signaling the validator for the contract
     * @dev  is the default transfer validator.
     */
    function _emitDefaultTransferValidator() internal {
        emit TransferValidatorUpdated(address(0), DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';

/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }

    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership)
    {
        unchecked {
            if (tokenId >= _startTokenId()) {
                if (tokenId > _sequentialUpTo()) return _ownershipAt(tokenId);

                if (tokenId < _nextTokenId()) {
                    // If the `tokenId` is within bounds,
                    // scan backwards for the initialized ownership slot.
                    while (!_ownershipIsInitialized(tokenId)) --tokenId;
                    return _ownershipAt(tokenId);
                }
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships;
        uint256 i = tokenIds.length;
        assembly {
            // Grab the free memory pointer.
            ownerships := mload(0x40)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(ownerships, i)
            // Allocate one word for the length,
            // `tokenIds.length` words for the pointers.
            i := shl(5, i) // Multiply `i` by 32.
            mstore(0x40, add(add(ownerships, 0x20), i))
        }
        while (i != 0) {
            uint256 tokenId;
            assembly {
                i := sub(i, 0x20)
                tokenId := calldataload(add(tokenIds.offset, i))
            }
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenId);
            assembly {
                // Store the pointer of `ownership` in the `ownerships` array.
                mstore(add(add(ownerships, 0x20), i), ownership)
            }
        }
        return ownerships;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        return _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        // If spot mints are enabled, full-range scan is disabled.
        if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) _revert(NotCompatibleWithSpotMints.selector);
        uint256 start = _startTokenId();
        uint256 stop = _nextTokenId();
        uint256[] memory tokenIds;
        if (start != stop) tokenIds = _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
        return tokenIds;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Helper function for returning an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * Note that this function is optimized for smaller bytecode size over runtime gas,
     * since it is meant to be called off-chain.
     */
    function _tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) private view returns (uint256[] memory tokenIds) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) _revert(InvalidQueryRange.selector);
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) start = _startTokenId();
            uint256 nextTokenId = _nextTokenId();
            // If spot mints are enabled, scan all the way until the specified `stop`.
            uint256 stopLimit = _sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max ? stop : nextTokenId;
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop >= stopLimit) stop = stopLimit;
            // Number of tokens to scan.
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength` to zero if the range contains no tokens.
            if (start >= stop) tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            // If there are one or more tokens to scan.
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength != 0) {
                // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), tokenIdsMaxLength)`.
                if (stop - start <= tokenIdsMaxLength) tokenIdsMaxLength = stop - start;
                uint256 m; // Start of available memory.
                assembly {
                    // Grab the free memory pointer.
                    tokenIds := mload(0x40)
                    // Allocate one word for the length, and `tokenIdsMaxLength` words
                    // for the data. `shl(5, x)` is equivalent to `mul(32, x)`.
                    m := add(tokenIds, shl(5, add(tokenIdsMaxLength, 1)))
                    mstore(0x40, m)
                }
                // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
                // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
                TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
                address currOwnershipAddr;
                // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned),
                // initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
                // `ownership.address` will not be zero,
                // as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
                if (!ownership.burned) currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
                // Use a do-while, which is slightly more efficient for this case,
                // as the array will at least contain one element.
                do {
                    if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) {
                        // Skip the remaining unused sequential slots.
                        if (start == nextTokenId) start = _sequentialUpTo() + 1;
                        // Reset `currOwnershipAddr`, as each spot-minted token is a batch of one.
                        if (start > _sequentialUpTo()) currOwnershipAddr = address(0);
                    }
                    ownership = _ownershipAt(start); // This implicitly allocates memory.
                    assembly {
                        switch mload(add(ownership, 0x40))
                        // if `ownership.burned == false`.
                        case 0 {
                            // if `ownership.addr != address(0)`.
                            // The `addr` already has it's upper 96 bits clearned,
                            // since it is written to memory with regular Solidity.
                            if mload(ownership) {
                                currOwnershipAddr := mload(ownership)
                            }
                            // if `currOwnershipAddr == owner`.
                            // The `shl(96, x)` is to make the comparison agnostic to any
                            // dirty upper 96 bits in `owner`.
                            if iszero(shl(96, xor(currOwnershipAddr, owner))) {
                                tokenIdsIdx := add(tokenIdsIdx, 1)
                                mstore(add(tokenIds, shl(5, tokenIdsIdx)), start)
                            }
                        }
                        // Otherwise, reset `currOwnershipAddr`.
                        // This handles the case of batch burned tokens
                        // (burned bit of first slot set, remaining slots left uninitialized).
                        default {
                            currOwnershipAddr := 0
                        }
                        start := add(start, 1)
                        // Free temporary memory implicitly allocated for ownership
                        // to avoid quadratic memory expansion costs.
                        mstore(0x40, m)
                    }
                } while (!(start == stop || tokenIdsIdx == tokenIdsMaxLength));
                // Store the length of the array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
                }
            }
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../access/OwnablePermissions.sol";

/**
 * @title AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice Base contract mix-in that provides boilerplate code giving the contract owner the
 *         option to automatically approve a 721-C transfer validator implementation for transfers.
 */
abstract contract AutomaticValidatorTransferApproval is OwnablePermissions {

    /// @dev Emitted when the automatic approval flag is modified by the creator.
    event AutomaticApprovalOfTransferValidatorSet(bool autoApproved);

    /// @dev If true, the collection's transfer validator is automatically approved to transfer holder's tokens.
    bool public autoApproveTransfersFromValidator;

    /**
     * @notice Sets if the transfer validator is automatically approved as an operator for all token owners.
     * 
     * @dev    Throws when the caller is not the contract owner.
     * 
     * @param autoApprove If true, the collection's transfer validator will be automatically approved to
     *                    transfer holder's tokens.
     */
    function setAutomaticApprovalOfTransfersFromValidator(bool autoApprove) external {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();
        autoApproveTransfersFromValidator = autoApprove;
        emit AutomaticApprovalOfTransferValidatorSet(autoApprove);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.1) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.2;

import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";

/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;

    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;

    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);

    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the highest version that has been initialized. See {reinitializer}.
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if the contract is currently initializing. See {onlyInitializing}.
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.1;

/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library Address {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.

        return account.code.length > 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");

        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library Math {
    enum Rounding {
        Down, // Toward negative infinity
        Up, // Toward infinity
        Zero // Toward zero
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
     */
    function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
     * zero.
     */
    function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
        return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
     *
     * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds up instead
     * of rounding down.
     */
    function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
        return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or denominator == 0
     * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv)
     * with further edits by Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator
    ) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
        unchecked {
            // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
            // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
            // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
            uint256 prod0; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
            uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
            assembly {
                let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                prod0 := mul(x, y)
                prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
            }

            // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
            if (prod1 == 0) {
                return prod0 / denominator;
            }

            // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
            require(denominator > prod1);

            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // 512 by 256 division.
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////

            // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
            uint256 remainder;
            assembly {
                // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)

                // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
            }

            // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator. Always >= 1.
            // See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.

            // Does not overflow because the denominator cannot be zero at this stage in the function.
            uint256 twos = denominator & (~denominator + 1);
            assembly {
                // Divide denominator by twos.
                denominator := div(denominator, twos)

                // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                prod0 := div(prod0, twos)

                // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
            }

            // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
            prod0 |= prod1 * twos;

            // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
            // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
            // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
            uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;

            // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also works
            // in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256

            // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
            // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
            // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
            // is no longer required.
            result = prod0 * inverse;
            return result;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator,
        Rounding rounding
    ) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
        if (rounding == Rounding.Up && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
            result += 1;
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded down.
     *
     * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }

        // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
        //
        // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
        // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
        //
        // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
        // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
        // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
        //
        // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
        uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);

        // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
        // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
        // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
        // into the expected uint128 result.
        unchecked {
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            return min(result, a / result);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = sqrt(a);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 128;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                value >>= 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                value >>= 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                value >>= 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log2(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >= 10**64) {
                value /= 10**64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >= 10**32) {
                value /= 10**32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >= 10**16) {
                value /= 10**16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >= 10**8) {
                value /= 10**8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >= 10**4) {
                value /= 10**4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >= 10**2) {
                value /= 10**2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >= 10**1) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log10(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 10**result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     *
     * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log256(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << (result * 8) < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

abstract contract OwnablePermissions is Context {
    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ICreatorToken {
    event TransferValidatorUpdated(address oldValidator, address newValidator);
    function getTransferValidator() external view returns (address validator);
    function setTransferValidator(address validator) external;
    function getTransferValidationFunction() external view returns (bytes4 functionSignature, bool isViewFunction);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ICreatorTokenLegacy {
    event TransferValidatorUpdated(address oldValidator, address newValidator);
    function getTransferValidator() external view returns (address validator);
    function setTransferValidator(address validator) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ITransferValidator {
    function applyCollectionTransferPolicy(address caller, address from, address to) external view;
    function validateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to) external view;
    function validateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) external view;
    function validateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) external;

    function beforeAuthorizedTransfer(address operator, address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
    function afterAuthorizedTransfer(address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
    function beforeAuthorizedTransfer(address operator, address token) external;
    function afterAuthorizedTransfer(address token) external;
    function beforeAuthorizedTransfer(address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
    function beforeAuthorizedTransferWithAmount(address token, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) external;
    function afterAuthorizedTransferWithAmount(address token, uint256 tokenId) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

/**
 * @title TransferValidation
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice A mix-in that can be combined with ERC-721 contracts to provide more granular hooks.
 * Openzeppelin's ERC721 contract only provides hooks for before and after transfer.  This allows
 * developers to validate or customize transfers within the context of a mint, a burn, or a transfer.
 */
abstract contract TransferValidation is Context {
    
    /// @dev Thrown when the from and to address are both the zero address.
    error ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();

    /*************************************************************************/
    /*                      Transfers Without Amounts                        */
    /*************************************************************************/

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _beforeTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateBeforeTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _preValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _afterTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateAfterTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _postValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a mint
    function _preValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a mint
    function _postValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a burn
    function _preValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a burn
    function _postValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a transfer
    function _preValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a transfer
    function _postValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /*************************************************************************/
    /*                         Transfers With Amounts                        */
    /*************************************************************************/

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _beforeTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateBeforeTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else {
            _preValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _afterTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateAfterTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        } else {
            _postValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, amount, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a mint
    function _preValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a mint
    function _postValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a burn
    function _preValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a burn
    function _postValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a transfer
    function _preValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a transfer
    function _postValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount, uint256 value) internal virtual {}
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

interface ITransferValidatorSetTokenType {
    function setTokenTypeOfCollection(address collection, uint16 tokenType) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}

/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * The `_sequentialUpTo()` function can be overriden to enable spot mints
 * (i.e. non-consecutive mints) for `tokenId`s greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;

    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================

    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;

    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;

    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;

    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;

    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;

    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;

    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;

    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;

    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;

    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;

    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;

    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;

    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================

    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }

    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();

        if (_sequentialUpTo() < _startTokenId()) _revert(SequentialUpToTooSmall.selector);
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID for sequential mints.
     *
     * Override this function to change the starting token ID for sequential mints.
     *
     * Note: The value returned must never change after any tokens have been minted.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the maximum token ID (inclusive) for sequential mints.
     *
     * Override this function to return a value less than 2**256 - 1,
     * but greater than `_startTokenId()`, to enable spot (non-sequential) mints.
     *
     * Note: The value returned must never change after any tokens have been minted.
     */
    function _sequentialUpTo() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return type(uint256).max;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256 result) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_burnCounter` cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex + _spotMinted - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            // With spot minting, the intermediate `result` can be temporarily negative,
            // and the computation must be unchecked.
            result = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
            if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) result += ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256 result) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            result = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
            if (_sequentialUpTo() != type(uint256).max) result += ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens that are spot-minted.
     */
    function _totalSpotMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) _revert(BalanceQueryForZeroAddress.selector);
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }

    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(URIQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);

        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }

    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether the ownership slot at `index` is initialized.
     * An uninitialized slot does not necessarily mean that the slot has no owner.
     */
    function _ownershipIsInitialized(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] != 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];

            if (tokenId > _sequentialUpTo()) {
                if (_packedOwnershipExists(packed)) return packed;
                _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
            }

            // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
            if (packed == 0) {
                if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                // Invariant:
                // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // before an unintialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                //
                // We can directly compare the packed value.
                // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                for (;;) {
                    unchecked {
                        packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                    }
                    if (packed == 0) continue;
                    if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
                    // Otherwise, the token is burned, and we must revert.
                    // This handles the case of batch burned tokens, where only the burned bit
                    // of the starting slot is set, and remaining slots are left uninitialized.
                    _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                }
            }
            // Otherwise, the data exists and we can skip the scan.
            // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
            // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
            // If the token is not burned, return `packed`. Otherwise, revert.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
        }
        _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);

        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool result) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            if (tokenId > _sequentialUpTo())
                return _packedOwnershipExists(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId]);

            if (tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                uint256 packed;
                while ((packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId]) == 0) --tokenId;
                result = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0;
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `packed` represents a token that exists.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipExists(uint256 packed) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // The following is equivalent to `owner != address(0) && burned == false`.
            // Symbolically tested.
            result := gt(and(packed, _BITMASK_ADDRESS), and(packed, _BITMASK_BURNED))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        // Mask `from` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        from = address(uint160(uint256(uint160(from)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS));

        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) _revert(TransferFromIncorrectOwner.selector);

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;
        assembly {
            // Emit the `Transfer` event.
            log4(
                0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                from, // `from`.
                toMasked, // `to`.
                tokenId // `tokenId`.
            )
        }
        if (toMasked == 0) _revert(TransferToZeroAddress.selector);

        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
            assembly {
                revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
            }
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;

            if (toMasked == 0) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);

            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            uint256 tokenId = startTokenId;

            if (end - 1 > _sequentialUpTo()) _revert(SequentialMintExceedsLimit.selector);

            do {
                assembly {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                    log4(
                        0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                        0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                        _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                        0, // `address(0)`.
                        toMasked, // `to`.
                        tokenId // `tokenId`.
                    )
                }
                // The `!=` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
            } while (++tokenId != end);

            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) _revert(MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            if (startTokenId + quantity - 1 > _sequentialUpTo()) _revert(SequentialMintExceedsLimit.selector);

            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);

            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);

        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // This prevents reentrancy to `_safeMint`.
                // It does not prevent reentrancy to `_safeMintSpot`.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints a single token at `tokenId`.
     *
     * Note: A spot-minted `tokenId` that has been burned can be re-minted again.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` must be greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     * - `tokenId` must not exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mintSpot(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        if (tokenId <= _sequentialUpTo()) _revert(SpotMintTokenIdTooSmall.selector);
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
        if (_packedOwnershipExists(prevOwnershipPacked)) _revert(TokenAlreadyExists.selector);

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, tokenId, 1);

        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // The `numberMinted` for `to` is incremented by 1, and has a max limit of 2**64 - 1.
        // `_spotMinted` is incremented by 1, and has a max limit of 2**256 - 1.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true` (as `quantity == 1`).
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(1) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // Updates:
            // - `balance += 1`.
            // - `numberMinted += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1;

            // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;

            if (toMasked == 0) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);

            assembly {
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    tokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
            }

            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
        }

        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, tokenId, 1);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely mints a single token at `tokenId`.
     *
     * Note: A spot-minted `tokenId` that has been burned can be re-minted again.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}.
     * - `tokenId` must be greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     * - `tokenId` must not exist.
     *
     * See {_mintSpot}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _safeMintSpot(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mintSpot(to, tokenId);

        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 currentSpotMinted = ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted;
                if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, tokenId, _data)) {
                    _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
                }
                // This prevents reentrancy to `_safeMintSpot`.
                // It does not prevent reentrancy to `_safeMint`.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._spotMinted != currentSpotMinted) revert();
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMintSpot(to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMintSpot(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _safeMintSpot(to, tokenId, '');
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);

        if (approvalCheck && _msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
            if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                _revert(ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
            }

        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
        }

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Overflow not possible, as `_burnCounter` cannot be exceed `_currentIndex + _spotMinted` times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) _revert(OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData.selector);
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)

            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str

            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }

            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev For more efficient reverts.
     */
    function _revert(bytes4 errorSelector) internal pure {
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, errorSelector)
            revert(0x00, 0x04)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */

import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';

abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;

    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );

        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }

        _;

        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }

    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.1;

/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.

        return account.code.length > 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");

        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }

    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.3.0
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();

    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();

    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();

    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();

    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();

    /**
     * `_sequentialUpTo()` must be greater than `_startTokenId()`.
     */
    error SequentialUpToTooSmall();

    /**
     * The `tokenId` of a sequential mint exceeds `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     */
    error SequentialMintExceedsLimit();

    /**
     * Spot minting requires a `tokenId` greater than `_sequentialUpTo()`.
     */
    error SpotMintTokenIdTooSmall();

    /**
     * Cannot mint over a token that already exists.
     */
    error TokenAlreadyExists();

    /**
     * The feature is not compatible with spot mints.
     */
    error NotCompatibleWithSpotMints();

    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================

    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);

    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }

    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================

        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
        // The amount of tokens minted above `_sequentialUpTo()`.
        // We call these spot mints (i.e. non-sequential mints).
        uint256 _spotMinted;
    }

    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');

    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.0;

/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/

library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }

    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');

    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}

Context size (optional):